2014 Cherokee

2014 Cherokee
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14KL74-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and features and equipment that are either standard or
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
therefore. description of features and equipment that are no
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of Please disregard any features and equipment de-
accidents. scribed in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
or improvements to its products without imposing any
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
obligation upon itself to install them on products pre-
portation.
viously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
I
nfor
mat
i
onPr
ovi
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
dedby
:
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all ROLLOVER WARNING
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe man-
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to ner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll
tions and recommendations in this manual will help over when some other vehicles may not.
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
Rollover Warning Label contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6 INTRODUCTION
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper- 1
ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The Vehicle Identification Number
VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on
the right front seat cross member (visible through an
opening in the carpet) and appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .26
dedby:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .29 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .62
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .63
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Belt Pretensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 2
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .74
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .116
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The (EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/
keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your
Ignition Node (KIN). Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger 2
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
1 — OFF have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal (KIN)

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
WARNING!
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
display in the cluster. access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the dren should be warned not to touch the parking
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in a location accessible to children, and do not
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
information. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
WARNING! (Continued)
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
cause serious injury or death. 2
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
CAUTION! Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
when leaving the vehicle unattended. addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
SENTRY KEY® the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
or unlocked. ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat- • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting tended.
problems and loss of security protection. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have position.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
Replacement Keys
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
authorized dealer. for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Customer Key Programming Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the 2
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something
performed at an authorized dealer.
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
General Information vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
subject to the following conditions: will flash.
Rearming Of The System
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• This device must accept any interference that may be
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
received, including interference that may cause unde-
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
sired operation.
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Arm The System same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, 3. If any doors are open, close them.
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙. To Disarm The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if
with the driver and/or passenger door open. equipped), refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ⬙ in ⬙Things
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
position. power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ , The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the 2
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
key to the ON position. you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
NOTE: and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Security System Manual Override NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the • The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
doors using the manual door lock plunger. tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
(extreme bottom position).
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
ther information. distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
activate the system.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
2
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Flash Lights With Remote Key
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Headlight Illumination On Approach
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
turn on. 2
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal. The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
(24 km/h) or greater.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your and horn will remain on.
Instrument Panel” for further information. • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Using The Panic Alarm vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold by the system.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Programming Additional Transmitters 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
performed at an authorized dealer.
other hand.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal (KIN) Remove Screw From Transmitter Case

2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal and
gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter Case
Case 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two life of the battery is a minimum of three years. 2
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference. This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
• This device must accept any interference received, (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
including interference that may cause undesired op- niently from outside the vehicle while still
eration. maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: • Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Hazard switch off
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
may reduce this range.
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
How To Use Remote Start
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start: • System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Shift lever in PARK • Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Doors closed • Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
vehicle
• Hood closed
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
WARNING!
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- 2
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon turely:
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled. • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
could cause serious injury or death. • Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Enter Remote Start Mode • The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
third cycle.
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Vehicle
NOTE: Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Remote Start mode.
Start request.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
the START button.
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if 2
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob When remote start is activated, the heated steering
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
ON/RUN position. turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
NOTE: remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle. The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Insert Key
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC until you
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Center (EVIC)” for further information. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
indicator is visible. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible) be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, number of reasons. A child or others could be
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
closing the door. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with 2
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you press the power door lock switch while the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This power door locks if:
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Place the ignition to the OFF position or 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door abled.
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN 2. All doors are closed.
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob. 3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
4. Any door is opened.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
authorized dealer per written request of the customer. further information.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system. 2
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
be opened only by using the outside door handle even Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock engaged.
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys- The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
tem, always test the door from the inside to make vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
certain it is in the desired position. feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the win-
dow, and open the door with the outside door handle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information. 2
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the theft Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
alarm.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Unlock From The Passenger Side FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle.
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
liftgate automatically. transmitter while a door is ajar.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door handle while a door is ajar.
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
the door is ajar.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic lift-
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the gate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock 2
with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: Location
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic
liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect®, only the liftgate will unlock
when you press the electronic liftgate release. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors. Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door

handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This 2
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate From The Rear
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Power Window Switches
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To open the window part way, press the window switch
WARNING!
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do window to stop.
not let children play with power windows. Do not 2
To stop the window from going all the way down during
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occu- AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
pants, particularly unattended children, can become Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
entrapped by the windows while operating the the window will go up automatically.
power window switches. Such entrapment may re-
sult in serious injury or death. To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Down Feature
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
The driver door power window switch and some model the first detent and release it when you want the window
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- to stop.
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Reset Auto-Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger additional two seconds after the window is closed.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close the window manually. to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, 2
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Wind Buffeting transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic
windows down, or the sunroof or Sky Slider™ (if release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the you press the electronic release on the liftgate For further
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding
the front and rear windows together to minimize the Your Instrument Panel”.
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky
To Lock The Liftgate
Slider™ open, adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider™ opening
to minimize the buffeting or open any window. With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
LIFTGATE located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE the electronic liftgate release.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas- 2
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing

the electronic liftgate release (refer to Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ located in Things To Know Be-
Liftgate Entry
fore Starting) or by pressing the LIFTGATE
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock liftgate is open, pressing the button twice within five
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate. seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
overhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
gate trim panel.
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings)
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further infor- WARNING!
mation, refer to ⬙Uconnect®⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your During power operation, personal injury or cargo
Instrument Panel⬙. damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: • The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully 2
(0 km/h).
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
full open position.
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches. • If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will dis-
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
engage to allow manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
meets sufficient resistance. within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power Some of the most important safety features in your
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a vehicle are the restraint systems:
detection of an obstruction.
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
WARNING! positions
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep wheel
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
make sure that all windows are closed, and the • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode. • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
energy during an impact event for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information 2
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
CHildren (LATCH).
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
item in a seat — if equipped rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
possible.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
WARNING!
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 You should read the instructions provided with your
years or younger, including a child in a rearward child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
vehicle with a rear seat. shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- Front Air Bags room to inflate.
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under between you and the door.
their arm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ. panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air 2
WARNING! bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more instrument panel.
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
Always wear your seat belts even though you have door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
air bags. seat.
(Continued) (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your be belted at all times.
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Lap/Shoulder Belts
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
you to be severely injured or killed. signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
belts are designed to go around the large bones of outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured 2
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best. or killed.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out belts.
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers using a seat belt properly.
safe, too. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
another in a collision, hurting one another badly. adjust the front seat.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
than one person, no matter what their size. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovithe belt go around your lap.
dedby:
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter-
nearest you. nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear sion.
your seat belt snugly. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
(Continued) likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
belt in a collision. your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. from your neck. Press the release button to release the 2
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
WARNING! that fits you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do position without pressing the release button. To verify
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, position.
etc.).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage the latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
folded webbing.
you will prefer a higher position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not 2
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
feature for each seating position. out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
Driver Center Passenger latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Second Row ALR ALR ALR Equipped
Third Row N/A N/A N/A
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
• N/A — Not Applicable locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
I
nfor anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
years old and under should always be properly re- Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat. to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until WARNING!
the entire belt is extracted.
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
now in the Automatic Locking Mode. working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Energy Management Feature tight around the occupant early in a collision. Pretension-
ers work for all size occupants, including those in child
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
restraints.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat 2
collision. belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is worn snugly and positioned properly.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
the occupant’s chest. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Belt Pretensioning
The driver and passenger front seating positions are Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
equipped with seat belt systems that may incorporate (BeltAlert®)
retractor pretensioning devices. These devices are de- BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
signed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
the event of a collision. These devices may improve the BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
fastened. be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
stowed.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- deactivating BeltAlert®.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
notification.
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
the best way to keep the baby safe. increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use 2
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. tions. Remove and store the extender when not
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the needed.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
Seat Belt Extender This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
tender, and store it.
I
nfor
mat
i Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
onPr
ovi
dedby:
panel below the steering column and a Supplemental NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Passenger Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
panel below the glove compartment. Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
1 — Driver Advanced Front 2 — Passenger Advanced Front
4Air Bag Air Bag
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
3 — Supplemental Driver Side 4– Supplemental Passenger Side seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
I
nfor
mat
i
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
onPr
ovi
dedby:
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC Air Bag System Components
air bags, are located above the side windows and their Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
2
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Air Bag Warning Light
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
• Steering Wheel and Column
the outboard side of the front and rear seats.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that may adjust • Knee Impact Bolster
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
upon occupant weight.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
authorized dealer immediately. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, bag on the instrument panel, because any such
and Seat Track Position Sensors objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features • Do not put anything on or around the air bag
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides damage the air bags and you could be injured
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as because the air bags may no longer be functional.
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
which may receive information from the front impact designed to open only when the air bags are
sensors. inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an any way.
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
used for more severe collisions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam on the side
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may of the seat’s trim cover (front seats) and between the side
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant seat’s cushion trim cover (rear seats — if equipped with
rear SAB). Each air bag deploys independently; a left side 2
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side
impact deploys the right air bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the Supplemental SAB and SABIC air
bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) protection.
Label Location
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
WARNING!
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the 2
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The child.
area where the side curtain air bag is located SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
should remain free from any obstructions. restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
between you and the SAB; the performance could seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
be adversely affected and/or objects could be dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
pushed into you, causing serious injury. windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your Knee Impact Bolsters
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma- The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
vehicle for any reason. Air Bags.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver and Pas-
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
senger Side Knee Air Bags and the knee bolsters to
provide improved protection for the driver and front The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to required for this vehicle.
improve occupant protection. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Air Bags Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Supple-
protection and work together with the Advanced Front
mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Passen-
Air Bags during a frontal impact.
ger Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners,
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front as required, depending on several factors, including the
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Knee Air Bags to severity and type of impact.
provide improved protection for the driver and front
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide
improve occupant protection.
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
Passenger Knee Air Bags are not expected to reduce the type of collision.
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. 2
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- have deployed.
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
away from an inflating air bag.
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental
Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags may deploy in The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
produce a severe initial deceleration. START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
WARNING!
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
air bag system immediately.
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Passenger Seat
comes on again after initial startup.
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- this vehicle.
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located in the Front Passenger Seat Occu- Front Passenger Air
front passenger seat pant Status Bag Classification
• OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat Rearward-facing infant Reduced-power de-
seat* ployment 2
• Air Bag Warning Light
Child, including a child in Full-power deployment
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger a forward-facing child re- OR reduced-power de-
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the straint or booster seat* ployment
inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
the sensors estimate that: OR reduced-power de-
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very ployment
light objects in it; or Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas- ployment
senger, including a child; or * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward allowing a full-power front passenger air bag deploy-
facing infant seat; or ment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her a rearward-facing infant seat, in the front passenger seat.
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
WARNING!
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air passengers are:
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 • Sitting upright
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat. • Facing forward
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child ably on or near the floor
restraint.
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the seat back in an upright position
front passenger seat occupant’s most probable classifica-
tion. The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front
passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should
be modified.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp-
erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen- 2
ger’s weight accurately. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat
belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright
position, your back against the seat back, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not
carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.)
while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an
Seated Properly object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen-
ger’s weight accurately, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel)
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
around
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
Not Seated Properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
S The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional informa-
WARNING!
tion). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas- Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the 2
properly, which may result in serious injury or death Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully
under the front passenger. latched to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may
result in misclassification of the front passenger’s weight.
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on whenever the
OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo-
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag
air bag system. inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a front
seat passenger, the OCS components must function as
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or designed. Do not make any modifications to the front
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for
immediately. any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow™ Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may
Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding be used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
WARNING!
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™ • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
with the latch before closing the seat. In addition,
after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin, • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed • At no time should any supplemental restraint system
downward and fully latched to the base. Overstuff- (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
ing the storage bin, or a not fully latched passenger be modified or replaced with any part except those
seat cushion, may result in misclassification of the which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC .
front passenger’s weight. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
WARNING!
The following requirements must be strictly followed: Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
components in any way. seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or could result in death or serious injury to the front
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags
modified vehicle may not comply with required fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) 2
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver
(CMVSS). and front passenger.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
Inflator Units vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. Air Bag Inflator Units
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
below the glove compartment. When the ORC detects a
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different Passenger Advanced
collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units.
Front Air Bag inflation rates are possible, based on
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
several factors, including the collision type and severity.
I
nfor
mat
i the Supplemental Knee Air Bags. The Supplemental Knee
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker/ high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
glove box surface allowing the air bags to inflate to the you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
milliseconds. especially applies to children.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
Inflator Units (SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- During collisions where the impact is confined to a
signed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
I
nfor
mat
iseated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
onPr
ovi
dedby:
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to event the ORC will determine whether to have the
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
when it is inflated. ing functions:
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine. 2
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
until the ignition is cycled to off.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact • Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.
events. • Turn Off the HVAC Blower Motor.
Enhanced Accident Response System • Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
the communication network remains intact, and the functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If A Deployment Occurs However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately.
immediately after deployment.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
the air bag system.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
or all of the following may occur: irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Maintaining Your Air Bag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2
WARNING!
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, protect you. Do not modify the components or
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
troller (ORC) system serviced as well. modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Bag Warning Light
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may You will want to have the air bags ready to
not function properly if modifications are made. inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
air bag system service. If your seat, including your circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any with air bag system electrical components. While the air
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved the air bag system immediately.
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
modify the air bag system for persons with dis- the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
abilities, contact your authorized dealer. first turned to the ON/RUN position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
eight-second interval. formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle 2
remains on while driving.
is designed to record such data as:
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly were buckled/fastened;
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good. • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a Child Restraints
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- times, including babies and children. Every state in the
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) United States, and every Canadian province, requires
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. the rear seats rather than in the front.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- There are different sizes and types of restraints for
ment, can read the information if they have access to the children from newborn size to the child almost large
vehicle or the EDR. enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
WARNING!
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
it in the vehicle where you will use it. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to 2
NOTE: hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org how strong you are. The child and others could be
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional infor- should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
mation:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
height or weight limits of their child rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
or who have out-grown the height or five-point Harness, facing forward in the
weight limit of their rear-facing child rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but are vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s of the vehicle
seat belt
Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight of the vehicle
limit of their booster seat
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Infants And Child Restraints reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear WARNING! 2
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
child seats. Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the years or younger, including a child in a rearward
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until facing infant seat.
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward- vehicle with a rear seat.
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
Older Children And Child Restraints
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
WARNING!
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
allowed by the child seat. collision. The child could be badly injured or
All children whose weight or height is above the killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a directions exactly when installing an infant or
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts child restraint.
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
in the vehicle by the seat belt. could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped 3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is 4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22 firmly against the seatback. 2
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
tall.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
follow these steps:
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
the hips and as snug as possible.
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
use. 8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
seat cushion. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
WARNING!
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before way back?
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
between their neck and arm?
An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury. 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
over the front of the seat when their back is against the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
vehicle’s seat belt alone: belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
the vehicle seat? or behind their back.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
Weight of the
LATCH –
LATCH – 2
Child + Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top
Restraint Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether This Vehicle
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether 2
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more 2
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All three rear seating positions have re-
movable head restraints.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D 2
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child
restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
install the center child restraint and you must use the anchorages in this vehicle:
LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
belt for installing the third child seat in position (1)
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
behind the front passenger.
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
I
nfor
mat
i child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing
onPr
ovi
dedby:
and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint
WARNING!
an occupant or child restraint in the center seating
position. • Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2): compatible child restraint in the center seating
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the • A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left out- will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
board seating position (3) for any occupant. The center outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this seat for another occupant.
position. • Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
• If you are installing three child restraints next to 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
tether anchor for the center position. You must use belt following the instructions below. See the section 2
the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position (3), behind the driver. You may use either Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for position has.
installing the child seat in position (1), behind the 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
front passenger. Please refer to “Installing the strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
typical installation instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- that seating position. For some second row seats, you
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint systems will be installed as described here. restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovito allow more room for the car seat.
dedby:
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
WARNING!
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
turer’s instructions. used by other occupants or being used to secure child
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
in any direction. buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the Belt
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking 2
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
them. types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
WARNING! not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
Improper installation of a child restraint to the be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
when installing an infant or child restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un- Restraints in this Vehicle
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the following
table(s) and the following sections for more information
about both types of seat belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forward the recommended weight limit of 2
facing child restraint? the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passen-
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat? allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re- Yes The head restraints may be re-
moved? moved in every rear seating posi-
tion.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch
tighten the seat belt against the belt plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
path of the child restraint? may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the car seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a the child restraint rearward and downward into the
“click.” vehicle seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints 2
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) You may also move the front seat forward to allow
in any direction. more room for the car seat.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
vehicle seat.
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
anchor. to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
in any direction. the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
Anchorage the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. 2
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and Tether Anchorage Locations
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
side of the head restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be- Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
tether strap. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
in the strap. mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
a collision. mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
in the engine or damage may result. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may 2
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
SAFETY TIPS
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Transporting Passengers belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
using a seat belt properly.
AREA.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. blower at high speed.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
follow these safety tips: the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system.
confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
your vehicle in or out of the area. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
mode. seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
(Continued) inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
Vehicle driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
2
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt. Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
Air Bag Warning Light vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
The light should come on and remain on for
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorizedI
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
sonal injury. been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
attached to the floor mat fasteners. driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer- control.
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the • If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
vehicle. stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mounting can cause interference with the brake
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches
The Vehicle Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
2
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
immediately.
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF 3
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .130
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .134
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .135
▫ Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect®
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .159 ▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .166
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .175 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
3
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .178 䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .191
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .180
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .192
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .181
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 ▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .198 ▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ ACC Operation at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .203 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .204
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .207
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .211
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .237
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
I
nfor▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . .
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: . . . .239
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .239 ▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF 3
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .253 Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .254 ▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .255
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .275
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .255
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .276
䡵 PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .279
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .280
dedby:
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .288
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
䡵 SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF — IF
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .286 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Sky Slider™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Opening The Sky Slider™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .287 ▫ Closing The Sky Slider™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .287 ▫ Anti-Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Sky Slider™ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .297 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
3
䡵 WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED . .298 ▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .310
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Glove Box Storage Compartment. . . . . . . . . . .302
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
I
nformounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: 3
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- Automatic Dimming Mirror
ment Panel” for further information. NOTE: The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1
button located on the bottom of the mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Assist Call 9-1-1 Call
The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button Report an accident without taking your eyes off the road.
which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to Just press 9-1-1 on your mirror and connect.
one of several predefined locations for immediate sup-
port: CAUTION!
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con- spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. mirror clean.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
Outside Mirrors
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via Mo- To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
bile features. to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will Power Mirrors
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s
lane next to your vehicle. door trim panel.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side 3
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches

1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left and Right Mirror Select
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Models With Express Window Feature Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left) The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position to the normal driving position.
following an adjustment.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
ter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions. will automatically unfold.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
Models Without Express Window Feature You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the • The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
To reset the power folding mirrors : Fold and unfold cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
them by pressing the button. (This may require multiple 3
button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar- Rear Detection Zones
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
rear/front/side of the vehicle. BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap- time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
proximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi- 3
contamination so that the BSM system can function
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
driver of vehicles in these areas.
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
NOTE: per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
tection zones. located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
Side Monitoring
alert during these types of zone entries.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 3
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overtaking/Approaching Overtaking/Passing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

RCP Detection Zones
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. situations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System — If
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Equipped
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Program-
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible mable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in 3
alarms, including reducing the radio volume. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Blind Spot Alert
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
the radio is muted.
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted. NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE: is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used
system, the radio is also muted.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SEATS Power Seats — If Equipped
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
vehicle. seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
WARNING! seat up, down, forward or rearward.
3
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Power Seat Switch

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
WARNING!
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
the switch when the desired position has been reached. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Power Seat Recliner Switch

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
3
Power Lumbar Switch
Front Seat Adjustment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the seat adjusters have latched. the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Lever
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death. 3
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Heated Seats — If Equipped Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 — If
On some models, the front and rear seats may be Equipped
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions. There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
WARNING! controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the right side of
tion or other physical condition must exercise care the Uconnect® display.
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
long periods of time. select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. to shut the heating elements OFF.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — 3
If Equipped
There are two heated seat soft-keys that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Uconnect® display.
within two to five minutes.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
to shut the heating elements OFF.
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driv-
Heated Seats Soft-Keys er’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
within two to five minutes. Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart-
ment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat 3
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
To operate the system, press the “Controls” soft-key
located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” vented seat soft-key
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
once to select HI-level ventilation. Press the vented
soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
Press the vented soft-key a third time to shut off the seat seats to operate.
ventilation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
Vehicle” for further information. justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
Head Restraints or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury event of a collision.
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push 3
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints

The rear head restraints have two positions UP and
DOWN. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
Push Button
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
downward on the head restraint. maintains some rear seating room.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary To Lower The Rear Seat
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
the middle outer edge of the seat.
easily.
3
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
belts.
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
latched seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
Recliner Adjustment
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
seat to recline the seatback. which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets. 3
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the Driver Memory Switch
appropriate number button on the switch. Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
I
nfor
mat
i 1. Turn the ignition ON.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- NOTE:
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
switch, then press the side of the number (1) button PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Informa- memory profile.
tion Center (EVIC), if equipped, will display which
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
memory position is being set.
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into memory profile.
memory as follows:
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
1. Turn the ignition ON. can be turned on and off through the EVIC, if
equipped. If the Recall Memory with Remote Key
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets). Unlock is not turned on in (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features then the Linking and Unlink-
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory ing the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
switch, then press the number (2) button within five will not be successful. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
seconds. The EVIC, if equipped, will display which Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
memory position is being set. Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovfor further information.
i
dedby:
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
Transmitter To Memory
1. Remove the key from the ignition.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed 2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on 3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
the RKE transmitter. switch, then within five seconds press and release the 3
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly.
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC,
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Program- if equipped.
mable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- transmitter within 10 seconds.
formation.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the
memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Memory Position Recall To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
NOTE:
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi- MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC, if equipped.
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the be selected.
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the Only)
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
display in the EVIC, if equipped. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press vehicle.
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (23 mm)
key from the ignition switch. forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
or Easy Entry.
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rear-
ward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy 3
equal to 2.7 in (68 mm) forward of the rear stop. The Entry and Easy Exit position.
seat will return to its previously set position when you
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC.
the LOCK position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch, Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (8 mm) Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is
between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (23 mm and 68 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
Two latches must be released to open the hood. latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the center front
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers edge of the hood.
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location

Hood Release
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Headlight Switch
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should The headlight switch is located on the left side of
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the instrument panel. This switch controls the 3
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-
matic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
WARNING!
lights — if equipped.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the third detent
for automatic headlight operation. When the system is
on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn
the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out
of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
Headlight Switch lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Headlight Time Delay
Automatic Headlights Only) This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on vehicle in an unlit area.
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
3
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
ment Panel” for further information. delay.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
turn off in the normal manner. Equipped
NOTE: The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
feature.
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the from high beams to low beams until the approaching
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in vehicle is out of view.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
• Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when-
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- headlights are off, the transmission is moved out of
ment Panel” for further information. “Park” position, and the parking brake is off. The head-
light switch must be used for normal nighttime driving. 3
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
lens will cause the system to function improperly. to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed Lights-On Reminder
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
dealer. is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fog Lights — If Equipped headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight switch.
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective. 3
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever • When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
Turn Signals
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lane Change Assist Front Map/Reading Lights
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash head console. Each light can be turned on by pressing a
three times then automatically turn off. switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off,
press the switch a second time. These lights also turn on
High/Low Beam Switch
when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed,
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever or when the dimmer control is turned completely up-
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. ward to the second detent.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
3
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats. If The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
your vehicle is equipped with a power sunroof the located on the left side of the instrument panel.
courtesy lights are located above the rear seats. The
courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the lens. To
turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the Ambient Light Control
right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness Rotate the dimmer control upward or downward to
of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders — increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
if equipped. located in the overhead console and the door handle
lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Dome Light Position Battery Saver Feature
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
panel dimmer control is in this position. interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. 3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex- WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
remain off when the doors are open. windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotat-
ing a switch, located on the end of the lever. For infor-
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to mation on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio hicle”.
when the position lights or headlights are on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park” 3
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System

Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
(fourth detent).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
viously selected.
Windshield Washer Operation

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
WARNING!
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
could lead to a collision. You might not see other spray the windshield with washer fluid.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the 3
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Mist Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped NOTE:
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
shield.
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi- • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver for further information.
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
following conditions: not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and 3
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C). TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle located below the steering wheel at the end of the
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever steering column.
is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as de-
sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
Tilt/Telescoping Lever ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect® 5.0 System — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps Press the “Climate” hard-key then touch the “Heated
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate up to 80 second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated 3
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect® 8.4 System — If Equipped
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Controls Soft-Key
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If wheel covers of any type and material. This may
Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Vehicle” for further information. 3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, (40 km/h).
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
right side of the steering wheel.
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To
Electronic Speed Control Buttons turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL should be turned off when not in use.
3 — RESUME
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Deactivate
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. out erasing the set speed memory.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
3
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-) 20 mph (32 km/h).
button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If the button
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
speed.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
I
nfor
mat
i
speed will be established.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph To Accelerate For Passing
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h). pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
decrease until the button is released. Release the button vehicle set speed.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
will be established. speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph moderate hills is normal.
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on Control.
selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
on vehicle configuration).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
WARNING!
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you vehicle directly ahead of you.
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use NOTE: 3
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
EQUIPPED apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling preset following distance, while matching the speed of
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a the vehicle ahead.
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
system. It is not a substitute for active driving tions into account, and may be limited upon
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil- adverse sight distance conditions.
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather • Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to distance warnings.
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road • Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehi-
conditions. Your complete attention is always re- cle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
quired while driving to maintain safe control of vehicle to a complete stop.
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can You should switch off the ACC system:
result in a collision and death or serious personal • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
injury. heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
• The ACC system: in highway construction zones).
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
(Continued)
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow- in this section.
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes. NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode 3
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a selected.
constant speed. You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Always confirm which mode is selected.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
appropriate distance between vehicles.
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will effect the performance of the
Adaptive Cruise Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons plays “ACC Ready.”
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
2 — SET+/ACCEL Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following To Activate
conditions: Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low. ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays
“ACC Ready.”
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set. 3
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
WARNING!
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle. • You press the CANCEL switch.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle • 3
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set • The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
speed. If this occurs:
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
the EVIC.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
accelerator pedal.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Turn Off NOTE:
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than 2
memory if: seconds, then the driver will either have to press the
Resume button, or apply the throttle to reengage the
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/
ACC to the existing Set Speed.
OFF button.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition. WARNING!
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low. The Resume function should only be used if traffic
To Resume and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed. follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Vary The Speed Setting Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
pressing the SET + button. the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph If the SET - button is continually pressed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h). until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is 3
reflected in the EVIC display.
If the SET + button is continually pressed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments NOTE:
until the button is released. The increase in set speed is • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
reflected in the EVIC display. - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by of the vehicle.
pressing the SET - button. • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Set- speed.
ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
(longer). the sensor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if 3
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert Brake Alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound When this occurs, you should immediately apply the
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the
capacity. vehicle ahead.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overtake Aid ACC Operation at Stop
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera- while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional moving within 2 seconds of your vehicle coming to a
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic, need for any driver action.
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
hand side of the Target vehicles. for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the parking
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC cancelled.
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right the ACC system will be cancelled.
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
When the ACC system is resuming speed, the driver not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or Control Ready.”
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
3
serious personal injury.
EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
ACC SET
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
instrument cluster.
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC: • Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off • System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap- • Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.” I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• System Off dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC /
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
• ACC Proximity Warning
system will deactivate.
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
five seconds of no ACC display activity. highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
Display Warnings And Maintenance
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
Warning this warning may temporarily occur.
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
conditions temporarily limit system performance. Cruise Control is still available. For additional informa-
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as tion refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become Mode” in this section.
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
vehicle behind the lower grille. malfunction.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items: longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive 3
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens. NOTE:
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment. once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due your authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
I
nfor
mat
i
ACC / FCW operation.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
temporarily occur.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per- If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil- examine the windshield and the camera located on the
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
system may also become temporarily blinded due to require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
When the condition that created limited functionality is
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
display “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
ality.
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
mance. NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC / FCW
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service ACC/FCW Warning Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/ ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to 3
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor- ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
mance may be limited. it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until 3
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and Classification Specifications:
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be 47 C.F.R. Part 15
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 47 C.F.R Part 15.515 3
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruis-
ing at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising
speed without requiring the driver to operate the accel-
erator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different cruise control modes,
press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Fixed Speed) CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
(Fixed Speed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set
result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM will
Speed) Cruise Control mode. appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn
on when the electronic speed control is SET.
WARNING! To Vary The Speed Setting
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
the system will not react to vehicles ahead. Be sure to you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is continue to increase until the button is released, then the
selected. Failure to follow these warnings can result new set speed will be established.
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
To Set A Desired Speed (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding
speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and the SET + button. If the button is continually pressed, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) To Cancel
increments until the button is released. The increase in set The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
speed is reflected in the EVIC display. Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise • The brake pedal is applied.
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is
continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will • You press the CANCEL button. 3
continue to decrease until the button is released. Release • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
the button when the desired speed is reached, and the tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
new set speed will be established.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h). heated).
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the • The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the To Resume Speed
SET - button. If the button is continually pressed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
increments until the button is released. The decrease in and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
set speed is reflected in the EVIC display. I
nfor
mat
i 20 mph (32 km/h).
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To Turn Off FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
memory if: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Operation
ON/OFF button. The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
• You turn off the ignition.
visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low. brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
button.
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If 3
the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the FCW Message
system will compensate and provide additional brake When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
force as required. in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h). Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than every type of potential collision. The driver has the
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
normal FCW activation and functionality. this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after 4 Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
will be deactivated until the next key cycle. the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located on the switch
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the panel below the Uconnect® display.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range,
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you. 3
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
Forward Collision Button the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the setting.
To Change The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking
Settings With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A System Screen — If To Change The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking
Equipped. Settings With Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen — If
Equipped.
Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivity and Active
Braking: Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivity and Active
Braking:
NOTE: The settings can only be changed when the
vehicle is in PARK. NOTE: The settings can only be changed when the
vehicle is in PARK.
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display. 1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on the lower
right side of the Uconnect® system.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far or Near
soft-key for your desired preference. 4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far or Near NOTE:
soft-key for your desired preference. Then press the
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
back arrow.
driver after ignition shut down.
6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key. overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the 3
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
higher rate of speed.
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to screens.
avoid a possible collision.
FCW Limited Warning
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
I
nfor
mat
i conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Once the condition that limited the system performance LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
LaneSense Operation
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer. The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
Service FCW Warning
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays: detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
the system checked by an authorized dealer. prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no below the Uconnect® display.
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster to prompt 3
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
not be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
LaneSense Warning Button
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
Sense On” message is shown in the EVIC. ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when the lane boundaries have not been detected and the
LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Lane Sense On Message

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left line flashes yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow
ing has been detected and the system is ready to Indicator)
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that the lane markings
have been detected. The LaneSense indicator is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings
in the EVIC and a torque warning in the steering wheel
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line turns from solid white to
solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
the steering wheel will turn to the right. approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes from a thin yellow line to thick
yellow line and the LaneSense indicator changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction 3
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid White Thin

Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7.0 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when the lane boundaries have not been detected and the
LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Lane Approached (Flashing Thin Yellow Line To Thick

Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
behavior for a right lane departure.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs. 3
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes (on/off) and the LaneSense
indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Thick Line/Flashing Yellow

Indicator)
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that the lane markings
have been detected. The LaneSense indicator is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings
in the EVIC and a torque warning in the steering wheel
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane departure
situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn
solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
the steering wheel will turn to the right. approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes thick yellow to thin yellow.
The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to
flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane 3
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Thick Yellow Line/Solid Yellow

Indicator)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
Lane Approached (Flashing Thick Yellow To Thin configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator) warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar alization settings.
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel position, the system will remain active until the vehicle 3
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
traction control system, electronic stability control, above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-
forward collision warning, etc.) ating speed, a warning will appear in the EVIC indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
EQUIPPED less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual ParkSense® Sensors
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
recommendations. obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal ParkSense® Display
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
tion of the obstacle. the park assist ready system status.
ParkSense® Warning Display The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys- If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec- If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
mation. sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
I
nfor
mat
i
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 (65-30 cm) 12 in (30
(in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) cm) cm) cm) cm)
cm)
Arcs — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Left ing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Center ing ing
Right ing
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second Tone (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime (for rear center center center
center only) only) only) only)
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below 3
ParkSense® Switch
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will further information. When the shift lever is moved to
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi-
the vehicle is in REVERSE. tion, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
ParkSense will not operate.
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-
quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON. SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per authorized dealer.
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cleaning The ParkSense® System • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors. • ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone. 3
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
NOTE:
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper- Failure to do so can result in the system not working
ating properly. properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®. a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
I
nfor
mat
i rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
onPr
ovi
dedby:
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
CAUTION! (Continued)
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
EVIC. ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense® that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered using ParkSense®.
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle. WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
CAUTION! when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
can result in serious injury or death.
close proximity.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
(Continued)
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem- The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the audible indications of the distance between the rear
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. 3
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem- ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false obstacle.
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off
via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
available. driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Transmission,
Assist system or the Braking System Module. the automatic braking function in REVERSE gear is not
available.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid- NOTE:
ing with a detected obstacle.
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
• The automatic braking function may not be applied vehicle.
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
substitute the driver.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
section of the Uconnect® System.
vehicle’s movements.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-
for the automatic braking function through ignition
tations of this system and recommendations.
cycles. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
changed to the ON/RUN position. tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®
REVERSE or DRIVE (NON-REVERSE for manual trans- Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
mission). If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense® Active 3
lever positions, the system will remain active until the Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
EVIC indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
ParkSense® Sensors tion of the obstacle.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ParkSense® Warning Display ParkSense® Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Rear Park Assist
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys- the park assist ready system status.
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the de- display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instru- vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
ment Panel” for further information. show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. 3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30
(in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) cm) cm) cm)
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
ing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Center ing ing
Right ing
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center center center
(for rear only) only) only)
center
only)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ume Re-
duced
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
3
Front Park Assist
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for
manual transmission, the ParkSense Warning screen will region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
No Tone/Solid Arc No Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance Greater than 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 47 in (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert None None None Fast Continuous
Chime
Radio Volume No No No Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle
tion.
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
pedal is applied.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
3
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
ParkSense® Switch
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display a
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
the vehicle is in REVERSE. ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at ei-
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
NOTE:
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the • Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/ ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other system operating properly. 3
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC, see an autho-
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
rized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
Cleaning The ParkSense® System it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
age the sensors. the vehicle is in REVERSE.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
radio when it is sounding a tone. should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
Failure to do so can result in the system not working object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an application to be delayed.
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is CAUTION!
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the the sensors will not be detected when they are in
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor close proximity.
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the (Continued)
instrument cluster.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using • Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
using ParkSense®. result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
3
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
WARNING! obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
You are responsible for safety and must continue to IF EQUIPPED
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to
can result in serious injury or death.
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver manually complete the parking maneuver.
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side). Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System
NOTE:
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be en-
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the abled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the
must intervene as required. Uconnect® display.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space 3
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch • Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist
switch
To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once • Driver’s door is opened
(LED turns on).
• Rear liftgate is opened
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again • Electronic Stability Control / Anti-lock Braking Sys-
(LED turns off). tem intervention
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Performing 6 parking attempts to position the vehicle NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
into the parking space. 15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC will instruct the driver to
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
operate and search for a parking space when the follow- 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
ing conditions are present: must then reactivate the system by pressing the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.
• Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or
in a forward gear (manual transmission) • The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
• Ignition is in the RUN position mud, dirt or other obstruction.
• ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
• Driver’s door is closed
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
• Rear liftgate is closed present.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h) Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the EVIC
display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
switch to change your parking space setting. from surrounding objects/vehicles)
NOTE: • When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn 3
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The • The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati- space (example: if passing multiple available parking
cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. parking space for the maneuver).
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.)
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Active ParkSense Searching Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

When an available parking space has been found, and the Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move place the shift lever into the REVERSE position. When
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
sequence. position, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings, and to remove their hands from the steer-
ing wheel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their 3
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system allows up
to 6 parking attempts to be made.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Entire Surroundings — Remove Hands From Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Steering Wheel After moving forward and checking your surroundings
When the vehicle has been moved into the parallel park you may be instructed to place the shift lever into the
position you will be instructed to place the shift lever into REVERSE position and move backward slowly into po-
the DRIVE position, move forward slowly and check sition while you check your surroundings.
your surroundings.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to Operation/Display
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Perpendicular Park” message will show in the EVIC
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed. display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral- ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
lel parking if you desire. from surrounding objects/vehicles)
NOTE: • When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The • The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati- space (example: if passing multiple available parking
cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. parking space for the maneuver).
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.)
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Active ParkSense Searching Display Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
When an available parking space has been found, and the Once the vehicle is in position you will be instructed to
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move place the shift lever into the REVERSE position. When
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
parking sequence. position, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings, and to remove their hands from the steer-
ing wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system allows up
to 6 parking attempts to be made.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Entire Surroundings — Remove Hands From Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Steering Wheel After moving forward and checking your surroundings
When the vehicle has been moved into the perpendicular you may be instructed to place the shift lever into the
park position you will be instructed to place the shift REVERSE position and move backward slowly into po-
lever into the DRIVE position, move forward slowly, and sition while you check your surroundings.
check your surroundings.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily dis-
played.
Check Entire Surroundings - Shift To Reverse

Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position
instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only • Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.
might be temporarily detected or not detected at Always check carefully behind and in front of your 3
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
will not be detected when they are in close prox- sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve-
imity. hicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ing up and moving forward. You are responsible
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be for safety and must continue to pay attention to
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her serious injury or death.
shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist system. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
• Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con- screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its above the rear License plate.
size and shape, giving a false indication that an When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
obstacle is behind the vehicle. delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 MPH, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
the OFF position. A touch screen control (soft button) to image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
disable display of the camera image is made available
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the
the vehicle.
camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be
disabled via a touch screen control (soft button) person- The following table shows the approximate distances for 3
alization entry in the camera settings menu. each zone:
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver.
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are shoulder when using ParkView®.
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect®
CAUTION!
5.0
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
1. Turn the Radio on.
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2. Press the “Settings” button.
drive path.
3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview® 4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” softkey to turn
Backup Camera” to enable/disable. the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON. indicate the system is turned ON.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED 3
8.4A/8.4AN
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
the Uconnect® display. door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key. systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink®
channels.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
rity Alarm is active. indicator flashes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please 3
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located Training The Garage Door Opener
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
view. opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the activates, programming is complete.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until button you want to program and the hand-held trans- 3
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
dedby:
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button several seconds of transmission.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
follow these steps: nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- and observe the indicator light.
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
view. ming is complete and the garage door/device should
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, 3
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- erase the channels.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
fully trained. programming, plug it back in at this time.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
not release the button.
dedby:
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink® If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, press and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- ter.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
also be used at any time. to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security • Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
General Information
WARNING!
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
while you are programming the universal trans- two conditions:
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 3
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as received including interference that may cause unde-
required by Federal safety standards. This includes sired operation.
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without NOTE:
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
safety information or assistance. approved by the party responsible for compliance could
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- void the user’s authority to operate the device.
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas • The term IC before the certification/registration num-
can cause serious injury or death. ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF The power shade switch is located to the right between
EQUIPPED the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power sunroof switch is located to the left between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switch
Power Sunroof Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Opening Sunroof — Express
WARNING!
A comfort stop position and full open position are the
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open posi-
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. Do tions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with minimize wind buffeting.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
3
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof second. The sunroof will open automatically to the
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed
entrapment may result in serious injury or death. position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown automatically open to the half open position prior to the
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could sunroof opening). Press the switch rearward and release
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”.
gers are also properly secured. During Express Open operation, any movement of the
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position
the sunroof.
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward. Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
open to the half open position prior to the sunroof closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
opening). Press and hold the switch rearward again, the forward again.
sunroof will open to the full open position and automati-
Venting Sunroof — Express
cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half sec-
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
held rearward again. is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Closing Sunroof — Express
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
opening to the Vent position. rearward again.
Opening Power Shade — Express Closing Power Shade — Express
3
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to second and the shade will close automatically from any
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
switch a second time from the halfway position and the will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
shade will automatically open to the full open position “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. movement of the switch will stop the shade.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
shade switch will stop the shade.
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. completely.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode Wind Buffeting
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
again. open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Pinch Protect Feature
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- window.
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
Sunroof Maintenance
release to Express Close.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
the glass panel.
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Ignition Off Operation Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle NOTE:
Information Center (EVIC)
• The system will not operate when ambient tempera-
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 ture is at –4°F (–20°C) or lower.
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this • The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of
3
feature. 86 mph (138 km/h) or above.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC • Opening and closing the Sky Slider™ repeatedly with-
out the engine running may run the battery down.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is CAUTION!
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the Sky Slider™ vehicle contents, and the vehicle
SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF — IF interior:
EQUIPPED
The Sky Slider™ is a full-length, soft-top, power roof that (Continued)
opens front to rear or rear to front.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider™ Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
when it is frozen. Wait until the Sky Slider™ is that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
thawed before operating. others around you:
• Opening the Sky Slider™ when damp, wet, or dirty • In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the soft- thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider™ open.
top material and the inside of your vehicle. Make Always fasten your seat belt properly and make
sure the Sky Slider™ is dry before opening. sure all passengers are properly secured too.
• Always close the Sky Slider™ when leaving your • Before operating the Sky Slider™ make sure that
vehicle, damage to the vehicle interior can occur. no moving parts of the Sky Slider™ can injure a
• Do not leave the Sky Slider™ open for several person or animal.
weeks at a time. Close it occasionally to prevent • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the Sky Slider™ components or the roof area while
the creases to smooth out. This is especially impor- operating the Sky Slider™.
tant if the Sky Slider™ was opened when not
completely dry. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sky Slider™ Control
• If potential danger exists while opening or closing The Sky Slider™ switch is located between the sun visors
the Sky Slider™ in Automatic Mode, press and on the overhead console.
release the switch immediately to interrupt the NOTE: The Sky Slider™ switch will operate when the
operation. ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position.
• If potential danger exists while opening or closing
3
the Sky Slider™ in Operator Mode, release the Opening The Sky Slider™
switch immediately to interrupt the operation. Using Automatic Mode
• Do not allow small children to operate the Sky
Slider™. Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the front and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle.
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position). second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the rear and
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can move automatically toward the front of the vehicle.
become entrapped by the Sky Slider™ while oper-
ating the Sky Slider™ switch. Such entrapment NOTE:
may result in serious injury or death. • During operation, any movement of the Sky Slider™
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
• To resume the operation from a partially open posi- Closing The Sky Slider™
tion, press and release the switch a second time.
Using Automatic Mode
• The Sky Slider™ will not open from the front and the Press and release the button in the center of the switch
rear at the same time. The Sky Slider™ must close fully and the Sky Slider™ will close automatically from any
before opening it from the opposite end. position.
Using Operator Mode
Using Operator Mode
Press the switch rearward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the front, press the switch
will open from the front and move toward the rear of the
forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™ will move forward.
vehicle.
Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™ travel at any
Press the switch forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™ point.
will open from the rear and move toward the front of the
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the rear, press the switch
vehicle.
rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider™ will move
NOTE: During operation, any movement of the Sky rearward. Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™
Slider™ switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof. travel at any point.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Manual Override
WARNING!
The Sky Slider™ drive motors are mounted to the roof
above the cargo lamp. In the event that your vehicle There is no anti-pinch protection when the Sky
losses battery power, you can close the Sky Slider™ by Slider™ is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects
turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a 6 from the Sky Slider™ before closing.
mm Allen wrench. To do so, you must first remove the 3
Wind Buffeting
cargo lamp from the headliner. Then, insert the wrench
into the “Allen” shaped hole in the appropriate motor Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
completely. The left motor facing forward will close the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle. The right windows down, or the Sky Slider™ in certain open or
motor will close the top when it is open from the front of partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
the vehicle. can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
The Sky Slider™ will retract automatically if it detects an with the Sky Slider™ open, adjust the Sky Slider™
obstruction while closing. If this occurs, remove the opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky
Slider™. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sky Slider™ Maintenance NOTE:
Refer to “Sky Slider™ Top Care” in “Maintaining Your • All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
Vehicle” for further information. outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS discharge.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power • To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
knob and element must be used.
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
CAUTION!
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
to the battery and powered at all times. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area

on the center stack of the instrument panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Power Outlet Rear Power Outlet

In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
WARNING!
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
To avoid serious injury or death:
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area. • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
vehicle. tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric tently and with greater caution.
shock and failure. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
CAUTION! accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the
device is unplugged. 3
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
Power Inverter Location
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Wireless Charging Pad

Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located inside the upper portion of the center con-
sole. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses 2. Adjust the position of the mobile phone on the pad
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile until charging begins.
device.
3. Use the adjustable cradle to hold the mobile phone in
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless position. The cradle moves by pushing down on the
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or finger tabs and moving the cradle in or out.
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone 3
provider.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit www.driveuconnect.com for additional in-
formation and for supported mobile phones.
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, perform the following:
1. Place only one mobile Qi enabled phone on the
Adjustable Cradle
wireless charging pad.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
WARNING!
once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a
different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile
readjusted. phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s)
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If
phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile
function normally as it is charging. phone and wireless charging pad, carefully remove
the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to
CAUTION! cool before removing. Failure to wait until the ob-
ject(s) cool could result in personal injury, including
Do not place your vehicle key fob on the wireless burns.
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature may
not work properly while a mobile phone is being
charged.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, located in the center armrest.
located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STORAGE
Glove Box Storage Compartment
The glove box storage compartment is located on the
passengers side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on
the latch to open the storage compartment.
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Glove Box Storage Compartment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Console Storage Compartment To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this
section for more information.
3
Center Console
Upper Console Charging Pad

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
WARNING!
phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
Center Console Storage
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
section for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Storage Bin Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
on the sides of the load floor. used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
3
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
Cargo Load Floor Loops only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your accident.
vehicle:
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
left door center pillar. secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put protect passengers from loose cargo.
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert the
right spring-loaded post (located on the end of the cover 3
housing) into the right attachment points.
Then, insert on the opposite end of the cover housing into
the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle.
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
Retractable Cargo Area Cover you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep release the handle.
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind- Rear Wiper/Washer Control
shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by the first detent for intermittent operation and to
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
I
nfor
mat
i while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on
onPr
ovi
dedby:
and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the Rear Window Defroster
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
val previously selected. The rear window defroster button is located on
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off the switch bank by the manual climate controls.
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
then turn off. and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the 3
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
vehicles equipped with Skyslider®.
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
soaking with warm water. sure that the load remains securely attached.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the External racks do not increase the total load carrying
window. capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! WARNING!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos- vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sible and secure the load appropriately. sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack 3
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ Driver Assist Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .317
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .318
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .361
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Displays — 3.5” Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
Displays — 7” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
5.0/8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .353 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .382 ▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touch-Screen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .382
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touch-Screen — If
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touch-Screen —
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .404
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .385
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Demister Outlet 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Stop/Start Ignition Button
2 — Air Outlet 6 — Electronic Speed Controls 10 — Glove Compartment 14 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Electronic Vehicle Informa- 7 — Storage Compartment 11 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Dimmer Switches
tion Center (EVIC) Controls 8 — Radio 12 — Uconnect® Hard Controls 16 — Headlight Switch
4 — Horn / Driver Air Bag / Climate Controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display/
1. Tachometer Odometer Display
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
(RPM x 1000). hicle has been driven.
2. High Beam Indicator U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
Indicates that headlights are on high beam. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
lights are on. be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
This indicator will illuminate when the park service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
lights or headlights are turned on. that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
Center”. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
6. Brake Warning Light ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
This light monitors various brake functions,
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
including brake fluid level and parking brake 4
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
application. If the brake light turns on it may
dropped below a specified level.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake the brake fluid level checked.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
sary.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
inspected by an authorized dealer. I
nfor
mat
i
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
onPr
ovi
dedby:
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the NOTE:
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
8. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped to ON/RUN.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
4
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles 9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see Light — If Equipped
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
problem diagnosed and corrected . trol (ESC) is off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10. Speedometer NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
Indicates vehicle speed.
13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
should be checked monthly when cold and
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
tires.)
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
12. Turn Signal Indicator equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sig- (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
nals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
will chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km). I
nfor
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has 4
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS to continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
warning have been established for the tire size
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
(Continued)
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause CAUTION!
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
14. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
fuel door is located. rized dealer for service.
15. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
17. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
WARNING!
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 4
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
16. Air Bag Warning Light poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
not require towing.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
18. Vehicle Security Light
CAUTION!
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and continuously after the alarm is set. The security
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic light will also come on for about three seconds when the
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. ignition is first turned on.
Immediate service is required.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
WARNING! (EVIC)
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you instrument cluster.
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
4
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip
A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip
A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
EVIC Buttons Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
Press the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press 4
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display 1. Brake Warning Light — If Equipped
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the This light monitors various brake functions,
cluster and consists of eight sections: including brake fluid level and parking brake
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
I
nfor
mat
i the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
WARNING!
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level. Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, 4
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
tion. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Do In Emergencies” for more information.
2. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped 4. Reconfigurable Telltail Display Area
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic The main display area will normally display the main
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
dealer for assistance. menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- • Unstored Messages
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
into several categories: the condition that activated the message is cleared.
• Five Second Stored Messages Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of (if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
message takes control of the main display area for leaves the vehicle).
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. • Unstored Messages Until RUN
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
long as the condition that activated it remains active) feature. This message type is displayed until the
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right • Five Second Unstored Messages
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pres- When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
sure”. message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped 6. Brake Warning Light
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system This light monitors various brake functions,
provides the driver with visual and steering including brake fluid level and parking brake
torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift application. If the brake light turns on it may
out of its lane unintentionally without the use indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
of a turn signal. the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
• When the LDW system is ON and ready the lane the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
lines and LDW indicator are the color gray.
4
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
• When the LDW system is armed, the lane lines disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
change to white and the LDW indicator changes to master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
green. hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
• When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation, Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
the approaching lane line and the LDW indicator System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
change from white to yellow. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
WARNING!
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
dropped below a specified level. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
the brake fluid level checked. Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
I
nfor
inspected by an authorized dealer.
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is 10. Reconfigurable Telltale Display
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- • Transmission Temperature Warning Light
tion. This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is mission fluid temperature that might occur
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
7. Fuel Gauge torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this 4
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
8. Low Fuel Telltale light goes off.
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until CAUTION!
fuel is added.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
9. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
been activated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
WARNING!
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
If you continue operating the vehicle when the operating and needs service. For further infor-
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi- mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and Your Vehicle.”
cause a fire. • LaneSense Service — If Equipped
• Low Coolant Level Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
coolant level is low.
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- filler cap is loose.
shield washer fluid is low.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11. Dedicated Speed Warning Telltale — If Equipped • Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates and is active only in
This area displays the dedicated speed warn-
4WD Low range when either the HDC switch
ing telltale.
on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK
mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
12. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following
This displays the set speed of the Electronic message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.
Speed Control. • Electronic Speed Control ON 4
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
13. Reconfigurable Telltale Area refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the • Electronic Speed Control SET
4WD Low switch is activated and the transmis- This light will turn on when the electronic
sion range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE speed control is SET. For further information,
position (Off-Road Mode). refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14. Reconfigurable Telltale Display NOTE:
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If • Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
Equipped tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER these conditions there will be a substantial increase
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steer- speeds and during parking maneuvers.
ing maneuvers may have occurred, which
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
caused an over temperature condition in the power
for service.
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no • Door Ajar
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull This light will turn on to indicate that one or
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system more doors may be ajar.
will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further
• Liftgate Ajar
information.
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Oil Pressure Warning Light If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the This light informs you of a problem with the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. light will come on when the ignition is first
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. check. If the light does not come on during starting, have 4
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. the system checked by an authorized dealer.
• Charging System Light If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
rized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
required. You may experience reduced performance, an 16. SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of
require towing.
service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized
• Oil Temperature Warning Light dealer as soon as possible.
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop 17. Temperature Gauge
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
possible. ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
15. 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive- ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels. CAUTION!
For further information on four-wheel drive operation Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Displays — 7” Display
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer cluster and consists of eight sections:
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
4
WARNING!
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 2. EVIC Selectable Display Area
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system This area displays selectable information (Compass,
provides the driver with visual and steering Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG).
torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift 3. Electronic Park Brake Failure
out of its lane unintentionally without the use of
a turn signal. This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
• When the LDW system is ON and ready the lane Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
lines and LDW indicator are the color gray. dealer for assistance.
• When the LDW system is armed, the lane lines 4. Brake Warning Light
change to white and the LDW indicator changes to
green. This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
• When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation,
the approaching lane line and the LDW indicator
change from white to yellow.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn- the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
ing” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.
WARNING! 4
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level. Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- into several categories:
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off • Five Second Stored Messages
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light message takes control of the main display area for
inspected by an authorized dealer. five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- long as the condition that activated it remains active)
tion. and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is “i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pres-
sure”.
The main display area will normally display the main
• Unstored Messages
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On” 6. Dedicated Speed Warning Telltale — If Equipped
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
This area displays the dedicated speed warn-
leaves the vehicle).
ing telltale.
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the 7. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message This displays the set speed of the Electronic
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and Speed Control. 4
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of 8. EVIC Selectable Display Area
message takes control of the main display area for This area displays selectable information (Compass,
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG).
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area • Electronic Speed Control SET
• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the speed control is SET. For further information,
4WD Low switch is activated and the transmis- refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
sion range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
position (Off-Road Mode). • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
• Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped Display
The symbol illuminates and is active only in This will display the distance setting for the
4WD Low range when either the HDC switch ACC system. For further information, refer to
on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-
mode for Selec-Terrain is selected. standing The Features OF Your Vehicle”.
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following 10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” are dis-
• Electronic Speed Control ON played indicating the shift lever position. Telltales
This light will turn on when the electronic “9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Electronic Range Select
speed control is ON. For further information, (ERS) feature has been engaged and the gear selected is
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” “Starting And Operating”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11. Instructional Area
CAUTION!
This area will display text to the visual warnings (i.e.,
“Push Brake To Start”). Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
12. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans- WARNING!
mission fluid temperature that might occur 4
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may If you continue operating the vehicle when the
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle cause a fire.
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
• Low Fuel Telltale
light goes off.
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has provide increased torque at the wheels.
been activated. For further information on four-wheel drive opera-
tion and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive
Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
Operating”.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low. • SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of
service. If this light is illuminated, see your autho-
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator rized dealer as soon as possible.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
shield washer fluid is low. This light will turn on when a ACC is not oper-
ating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
• 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• LaneSense Service — If Equipped the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure. and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It
is a good idea for you to make a record of the
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
filler cap is loose. door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be 4
reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
13. Odometer Display / Fuel Gauge / Temperature Gauge /
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Submenu Area
(EVIC) messages and Submenus.
• The odometer display shows the total distance the
• Fuel Gauge
vehicle has been driven.
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi- remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
cates that the engine cooling system is operating turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
satisfactorily. rized dealer for service.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain WARNING!
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION! look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads System Pressure Cap paragraph.
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display • Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
• Engine Temperature Warning Light Equipped
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steer-
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. ing maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance 4
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: • Oil Pressure Warning Light
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera- This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under light should turn on momentarily when the engine
these conditions there will be a substantial increase is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime
speeds and during parking maneuvers. will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
for service.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Door Ajar
• Charging System Light
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
more doors may be ajar.
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
• Liftgate Ajar electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate the charging system light remains on, it means that the
may be ajar. vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the • Oil Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
light will come on when the ignition is first high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have possible. 4
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the Oil Change Required
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
I
nfor
mat
i upon your personal driving style.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if OFF/LOCK position.
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but-
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure. Driver Assist Menu
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster.
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.) The information it displays depends on ACC system
status.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SPress the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off 4
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the five seconds of no ACC display activity.
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
Messages
ACC SET
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
instrument cluster. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled • Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
• Service Airbag System • Service Tire Pressure System
• Traction Control Off • Parking Brake Engaged
• Washer Fluid Low • Brake Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low • Service Electronic Braking System
• Oil Change Due • Engine Temperature Hot
• Fuel Low • Battery Voltage Low
• Service Antilock Brake System • Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Lights On
• Service Power Steering • Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Off • Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Ready • Turn Signal On
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH • Vehicle Not in Park
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Key in Ignition • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Key in Ignition Lights On • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Key to Run • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low • Doors Open
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold • Tailgate Open 4
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open • Gear Not Available
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open • Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open • Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired • Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset • Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Service Airbag System • Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Service Airbag Warning Light • Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Digital Speedometer
• Service Transmission
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• Service Shifter button until the Digital display icon is high-
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling lighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On sub-menus and press the OK button to change the
• Washer Fluid Low display between Digital Speedometer or Analog
Speedometer.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
middle, and red telltales on the left.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Press the
EVIC.
LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the infor-
mation sub-menus and press the OK button to select or
I
nf reset the following resettable sub-menus:
or
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
Only XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
Oil Temp
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
Coolant Temperature color than the other tire pressure value.
Oil Life If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Battery Voltage 4
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
Tire Pressure
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until to the main menu.
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fuel Economy • Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted. Stored Messages
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
L/100 km with Bargraph) Press and release the UP arrow button until the
Messages display icon is highlighted in the
• Range To Empty (RTE) EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG) warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Trip Info
Audio
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip icon is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or
right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip A information Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
will display the following: button until the Audio display icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC.
• Distance
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Screen Setup Upper Left
• None
• Compass
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the • Outside Temp (default setting)
OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
• Oil Temp
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location • Time 4
that information is displayed.
• Range To Empty (RTE)
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Average MPG
Gear Display
• Current MPG
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
• Trip A
• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
• Trip B
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Upper Right Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• None
• Cancel
• Compass (default setting)
• Okay
• Outside Temp
Center
• Oil Temp
• None
• Time
• Compass
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Outside Temp.
• Average MPG
• Time
• Current MPG
• Range to Empty
• Trip A
• Average MPG
• Trip B
• Current MPG
• Trip A
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Trip B
• Audio Information
• Menu Title (Default Setting)
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel 4
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-keys And Hard-keys

1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back hard-keys located below the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to
turn the screen on.
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-keys And Hard-keys Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
option on the Uconnect® system.
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Soft-Keys next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
5.0/8.4 Settings settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the or down through the available settings.
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable Display 4
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
will be available.
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SiriusXM Setup. • Display Mode
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a When in this display you may select one of the auto
time. display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
arrow back soft-key.
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale • Units
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
soft-key. odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Voice Response Length
soft-key. When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
• Set Language sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
When in this display, you may select one of three
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
to return to the previous menu.
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desiredI
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Touchscreen Beep Clock
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is will be available.
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a • Sync Time With GPS
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key When in this display, you may automatically have the
to return to the previous menu. radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark 4
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a previous menu.
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
I
nfor
mat
i
close out of the settings screen.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
• Set Time Minutes Safety / Assistance
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To lowing settings will be available:
make your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen. set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
• Time Format possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
When in this display, you may select the time format you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving,
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. of you. This allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence. To change the FCW status, touch and release the
Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking — lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
If Equipped provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
start point.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the Vehicle”.
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a • Lane Departure Torque — If Equipped
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes 4
active at 5 mph (8 km/h). When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision The amount of directional torque the steering system can
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
Features Of Your Vehicle”. departure can be set at Low, Medium or High.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• ParkSense® Active Park Assist — If Equipped Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
formation.
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 • ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Chime Volume — If
km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Equipped
Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in
and operating information. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
• ParkSense® Front Park Assist Chime Volume — If formation.
Equipped • ParkSense® Active Park Assist Braking — If
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected Equipped
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
and operating information. mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the 4
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their arrow back soft-key.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped in the BSM not operating to specification.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature • ParkView® Rear Backup Camera — If Equipped
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
I
nfor
mat
i Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a • Fixed ParkView® Rear Backup Camera Guide Lines —
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the If Equipped
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key, the width of the vehicle.
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
to return to the previous menu. When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
• Active ParkView® Rear Backup Camera Guide Lines — up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
If Equipped
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. setting, touch the Headlights Off Delay soft-key, and
choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. A
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode
check-mark appears next to setting indicating that the
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys- to return to the previous menu.
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, 4
rotors, etc.). When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Lights touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
previous menu.
will be available.
• Headlights Off Delay • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are • Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
that the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights • Adaptive Front Lighting
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn
ditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High
relative to a change in the direction of the steering wheel.
Beams soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
To make your selection, touch the Adaptive Front Light-
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
ing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
menu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Flash Headlights With Lock opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature • Auto Lock
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been (24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto Lock 4
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
previous menu. indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
Doors & Locks back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Sound Horn With Lock
settings will be available:
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
• Auto Unlock On Exit the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check-
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
grammed touching the handle more than once will only
return to the previous menu.
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
use RKE transmitter).
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When • Passive Entry
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- Auto-On Comfort
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. After pressing the Auto-On Comfort soft-key the follow-
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped ing settings will be available:
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to • Horn With Remote Start
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a 4
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touchcheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat return to the previous menu.
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
for further information. heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
I
nfor
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, • Headlight Off Delay
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Engine Off Options when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, touch the + or - soft-key to select your
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol- desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
lowing settings will be available. return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
Compass Setting — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped), ing settings will be available.
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to • Variance
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45 differences the variance should be set for the zone where
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
arrow back soft-key. set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the • Perform Compass Calibration
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the com-
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
pass module is located, and it can cause interference with
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free 4
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
I
nfor
mat
i
Fade settings.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
• Equalizer • Surround Sound — If Equipped
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back back soft-key.
soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the fol-
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch lowing settings will be available:
directly on the desired setting.
• Paired Devices
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to / Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Radio Setup • Regional
After pressing the Radio Setup soft-key the following When this feature is selected it forces regional service-
settings will be available. following enabling automatic switching to network sta-
• Traffic Announcement tions. To change the Regional setting touch the Off or On
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
When this feature is selected it allows the system to pause selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
receivers and media to issue a traffic bulletin. To change
the Traffic Announcement setting touch the Off or On Restore Settings 4
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when After pressing the Restore Settings soft-key the following
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. settings will be available:
• Alternative Frequency • Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it allows the frequency to When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
change automatically to maintain the strongest signal To Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
change the Alternative Frequency setting touch the Off or settings to their default setting touch the Yes or No
On soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Clear Personal Data iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings soft-key
the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data touch the Yes or No soft-key. A check mark
will appear in the box when selected. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
1 – USB Port 2 – SD Card Slot
3 – AUX Port
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB
port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
4
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
access the switches. pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/AUX, etc.). track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
control is different depending on which mode you are in. after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
each mode. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
precautions: removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in 4
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touch-Screen —
If Equipped 1 – RECIRCULATION Control 5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
2 – Front Blower Control 6 – REAR DEFROST Mode
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning 3 – MAX Air Conditioning (A/C) 7 – MODE Control
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary 4 – Temperature Control
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Blower Control Temperature Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use Use this control to regulate the tem-
this control to regulate the amount of perature of the air inside the passenger
air forced through the system in any compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
mode you select. The blower speed terclockwise, from top center into the
increases as you move the control blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
clockwise from the OFF position. temperatures. Rotating the knob clock- 4
wise, into the red area, indicates
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the warmer temperatures.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position. Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
engaged.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAX A/C Mode Control (Air Direction)
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is Mode control allows you to choose
recirculated. from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
a blend of two of these modes. The
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
closer the control is to a particular
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
mode, the more air distribution you
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-
receive from that mode.
mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the con- Panel Mode
denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Bi-Level Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer 4
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved Defrost Mode
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control • In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
Press this button to choose between outside air intake or
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
defogging, select the outside air position.
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior ing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid button.
weather.
Air Outlets
NOTE:
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED airflow.
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make seat passengers.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Economy Mode Manual Climate Controls With Touch-Screen — If
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to Equipped
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Hard-Keys
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem- The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Stop/Start System – If Equipped 4
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Hard-keys
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls —

Soft-keys
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls —

Soft-keys
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And 4. Front Defrost Button
Soft-keys)
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
1. MAX A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
Press and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator with maximum temperature settings for best windshield 4
will turn off. and side window defrosting and defogging.
2. A/C Button 5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing thisdefroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
function again will cause the A/C operation to switchAn indicator will illuminate when the rear window
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
3. Recirculation Button this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
Press and release to change the current setting, the timer function.
indicator illuminates when ON.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Blower Control
CAUTION!
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
forced through the climate system. There are seven
the heating elements:
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
as follows:
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after Hard-key
soaking with warm water. The blower speed increases as you turn the control
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
window cleaners on the interior surface of the speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7. Modes • Bi-Level Mode
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
as follows: NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
• Panel Mode ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument warmer air from the floor outlets. 4
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually • Floor Mode
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and of air is directed through the defrost and side
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There window demister outlets.
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off • Mix Mode
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX 10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
for warmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen,
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
press and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the
when necessary.
red arrow soft-key for warmer temperature settings.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera-
ON/OFF.
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4) the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button
area indicates cooler temperatures.
for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-screen,
press and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the
blue arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Climate Controls With Touch-Screen — Soft-Keys
If Equipped Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —

Soft-keys
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And 4. AUTO Operation Button
Soft-keys)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
Press and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
indicator illuminates when ON. system will return to the previous setting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An window cleaners on the interior surface of the
indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is window.
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five
additional minutes will be added to the timer function. 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
4
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
CAUTION! control. Push the hard-key button for warmer tempera-
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to ture settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
the heating elements: soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear for warmer temperature settings.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth automatically exit Sync.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button 10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature forced through the climate system. There are seven
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
for cooler temperature settings. speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync. Hard-key
9. SYNC The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger Soft-key
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11. Modes • Bi-Level Mode
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
as follows:
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
• Panel Mode ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument warmer air from the floor outlets. 4
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually • Floor Mode
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
of air is directed through the defrost and side
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off window demister outlets.
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. • Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12. Climate Control OFF Button settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
for warmer temperature settings.
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- time.
trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
Climate Control Functions
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key A/C (Air Conditioning)
for cooler temperature settings.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
time. cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
trol. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from When outside air contains smoke, odors, or 4
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the you may wish to recirculate interior air by
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
is ON.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
Automatic Operation
feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Con- Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula-
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9,
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
14, 15). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
and then turn off.
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Manual Operation Override
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide trol.
comfort as quickly as possible. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
units by selecting the Uconnect® customer- a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This 4
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Sys- allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
tem Settings” in this section of the manual. circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. selected in Manual operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operating Tips Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
Window Fogging
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
Winter Operation
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months but rainy or humid weather.
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
slush, and snow.
periods, as fogging may occur.
A/C Air Filter
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or The climate control system filters outside air containing
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in 4
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
Outside Air Intake
tions.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .420
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Nine–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .420
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .428 5
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ 1–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ 2–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .417
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ SRear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System – If 䡵 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB). . . . . . . . . .445
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .453
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .459
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . .462
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .466 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .487
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Run Flat Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Spare Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 5
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .496
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .485
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .499
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .500 ▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .518
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .506 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 ▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .513 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovMOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
i
dedby:
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .534 ▫ Recreational Towing — 4WD Models with 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 ▫ Recreational Towing — 4WD Models with 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
WARNING! Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key mode. A child could operate power windows, other
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
driving range.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be Normal Starting
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
or the shift lever. is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
(Continued)
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK Extended Park Starting
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the ve-
Starting” procedure.
hicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
Tip Start Feature
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself 2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the when the engine starts.
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place the 5
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 5
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
procedure. Extended Park Starting procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) 4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts, allow the
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- procedure.
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
serious personal injury. cies” for further information.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- With Tip Start
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
could enter the catalytic converter and once the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and vehicle. the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
(Continued) release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
seconds before trying again. cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 5
decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits ing precautions are not observed:
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a a complete stop.
grounded three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood (Continued)
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
idle speed. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
speed. turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) posi-
is firmly pressing the brake pedal. tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
shifting out of PARK.
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
number of reasons. A child or others could be vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal someone or something. Only shift into gear when
or the shift lever. the engine is idling normally and your foot is
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or firmly pressing the brake pedal. 5
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Key Ignition Park Interlock
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
position. A child could operate power windows, lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
other controls, or move the vehicle. before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF
(key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
(Continued) from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF
position, and the transmission is locked in PARK when-
ever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
driving.
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
pedal must be pressed. vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Nine–Speed Automatic Transmission
hundred miles (kilometers).
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
efficient nine-speed transmission. The transmission gear
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
range (PRND) is displayed both beside the shift lever and
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To
shifting between these gears.
select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever
and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE- positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Mov- Gear Ranges
ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
DRIVE position) displays the current gear in the instru- NEUTRAL into another gear range.
ment cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond
this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the shift lever forward (-) NOTE:
or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear. • After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P) 5
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
Shift Lever brake.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi- • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
grade. PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
WARNING! if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- someone or something. Only shift into gear when
ment and possible injury or damage. the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the number of reasons. A child or others could be
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) posi- or the shift lever.
tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or 5
the vehicle against unwanted movement. in a location accessible to children), and do not
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
fob and lock your vehicle. Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
(Continued) controls, or move the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
CAUTION!
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
must place the ignition from the LOCK/OFF posi- will not move out of PARK.
tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever REVERSE (R)
could result. This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this stop.
can damage the drivetrain.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DRIVE (D)
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
practices that limit your response to changing traffic automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
or road conditions. You might lose control of the DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
vehicle and have a collision. tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
CAUTION! when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- 5
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section) to select a lower gear
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
for further information. will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor- “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
mal operating limits, the transmission controller may Normal operation will resume once the transmission
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine temperature has risen to a suitable level.
torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter
SPORT - IF EQUIPPED
clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
damage due to overheating. This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans- creased to make full use of available engine power.
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until the trans- SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
mission cools down. center console. Refer to ⬙Selec-Terrain⬙ in this section for
further information.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission Transmission Limp Home Mode
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- Transmission function is monitored electronically for
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
I
nfor
mat
i selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
onPr
ovi
dedby:
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
aging the transmission. diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
dealer service is required.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps: Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
1. Stop the vehicle. The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if 5
you shift the transmission into 5 (fifth gear), the trans-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. mission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
5. Restart the engine. vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no position, the transmission will operate automatically,
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal shifting between all available gears.
operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the shift lever forward (-). The transmission will shift to the
top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top
available gear. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the 1–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped
DRIVE position. This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive
(4WD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
WARNING! additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
personal injury.
rear wheels.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
5
1–Speed 4WD Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain Switch
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
2–Speed 4WD Switch driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
range position can be used to provide an additional gear there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
reduction which allows for increased torque to be deliv- speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
ered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is
Shift Positions
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause in- For additional information on the appropriate use of each
creased tire wear and damage to driveline components. 4WD system mode position, see the information below:
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine NEUTRAL
speed is approximately three times that of the normal This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to 5
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-
km/h). ing” for further information.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the driveline components.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for fur-
WARNING!
ther information on the various positions and their
You or others could be injured if you leave the intended usages.
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in
Shifting Procedures
the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engag-
ing the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position Shifting Into 4WD LOW
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
regardless of the transmission position. The parking shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
brake should always be applied when the driver is “4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
not in the vehicle. light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and
remain on solid when the shift is complete.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h). I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Shifting Out Of 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message 5
will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete
Selec-Terrain Switch
the requested shift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a mes-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your In-
sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
strument Panel” for further information.
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop- the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for regardless of the transmission position. The parking
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. brake should always be applied when the driver is
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to not in the vehicle.
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow
transmission to PARK.
the shift.
2. Turn OFF the ignition.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
WARNING! do not start the engine.
You or others could be injured if you leave the 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engag-
ing the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the 7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button (lo- stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
cated above the selector switch) for four seconds. The
8. Start the engine.
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indi-
cating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay 9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake. 5
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
Neutral Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System – If Deactivating the Rear E-Locker System
Equipped To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking conditions must be met:
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the indicator light on.
Selec-Terrain Knob.
2. The ignition switch in the ON position or the engine
Activating the Rear E-Locker running.
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK
conditions must be met: button once.
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW. NOTE:
2. The ignition switch in the ON position or the engine • It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
running. and forth to complete engagement and disengagement
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h). of the E- Locker.
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK • When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
button once. the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights • The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD
button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a mes-
the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off. sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with
the requested shift.
the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being SELEC-TERRAIN™
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. Description
The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling, Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle 5
below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to best performance for all terrains.
align.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain™ knob to select the desired
mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
• Sport – This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
• Sand/Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
Selec-Terrain™ offers the following modes:
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may
operation can be used on and off road. Balances be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
traction with seamless steering feel to provide im- controls are set to limit traction control management of
proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel throttle and wheel spin.
drive vehicles. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
ruts, etc. characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
NOTE: Rock mode is only available on the vehicles ordinary cars.
equipped with the Off-Road package. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as 5
Display Messages conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
Instrument Panel” for further information.
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION!
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase ing through water may cause damage that may not be
low-speed pulling power (Refer to “All Wheel Drive and covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further
Driving through water more than a few inches/
details). This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additionalcentimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
4WD LOW range. bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
Driving Through Water controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through to minimize wave effects.
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Flowing Water Maintenance
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Trans-
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross fer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your (milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
drifting.
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional 5
Standing Water
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-
WARNING!
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control. If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
Hill Climbing make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side. down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills. straight up or down.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your provide traction to complete the climb.
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Traction Downhill • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
exhaust system for damage.
System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent
Control if equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
System⬙ in this section for further information. Let the required.
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
turning against engine compression drag. This will per-
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
mit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking values specified in the Service Manual. 5
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
sion whenever possible. things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
can get any problems taken care of right away and have and cleaned as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
your vehicle ready when you need it.
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
WARNING!
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
not have full braking power when you need it to manually.
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked WARNING!
and cleaned as necessary.
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for obtained as soon as possible.
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
correct the situation.
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
POWER STEERING EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely
The electric power steering system will give you good
the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
“Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understand-
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
I
nfor
mat
iing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
during parking maneuvers.
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
service.
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect® settings. 5
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal move-
ment. The park brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch if OFF, however, it can only be released
when the ignition switch is ON.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission,
when the ignition switch is turned OFF. Once the park
brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch
Electric Parking Brake Switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
while the parking brake is engaging.
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking The parking brake will release automatically when the
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, Ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in Drive or
The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and Reverse, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is
an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is made to drive away.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
WARNING!
must be ON. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
the parking brake switch down momentarily. You may • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the car parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once ment and possible injury or damage.
the parking brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE warn- • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
ing lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
on the switch will extinguish. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to 5
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the number of reasons. A child or others could be
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha- warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of or the shift lever.
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
(Continued)
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
in a location accessible to children, and do not the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could an authorized dealer immediately.
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle. If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
failure and a collision. switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury. To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
reaches approximately 3 mph, the parking brake will the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
remain engaged. manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is
turned off. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
WARNING! customer selection through the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect® Settings.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake sys- by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
tem. the transmission is placed in PARK.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park

Safehold 5
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis-
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking sion is not in Park, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
brake to hold the vehicle stationary. door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
Auto Park Brake the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied vehicle from rolling.
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open. to be activated:
Once manually bypassed, Safehold will be enabled again
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again. • The park brake must be unapplied.
Brake Service Mode • The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your autho- While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
rized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should
only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service. When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the park brake system to
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for normal operation:
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can • Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake actuator. • Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily by enter-
ing the Brake Service Mode through the ’Uconnect® Settings • Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
in your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
order to perform rear brake service.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
WARNING!
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
You can be badly injured working on or around a accurate signals for the computer.
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If WARNING!
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
chanic.
of braking effectiveness.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph 5
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent and snow. This is normal.
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
surfaces.
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. electronic interference caused by improperly in-
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just stalled aftermarket radios or telephones.
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop. NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded • Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
the traction afforded. unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those tances, or brake damage.
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
sible.
the safety of others. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up, ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver- system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction
ing, parking, or stopping. Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work
build up between the tire tread and the road. This together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking various driving conditions.
ability, and control. 5
Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer Sway Control
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance (RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). Further, all
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by vehicles equipped with a two-speed power transfer unit
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very have Hill Descent Control (HDC) and some vehicles may
slow speeds. also be equipped with Selec Speed Control (SSC).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls safety or the safety of others.
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Traction Control System (TCS)
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
Operating” for further information.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
WARNING!
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve- Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
hicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent col- axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
lisions, including those resulting from excessive the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
WARNING!
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS) The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous 5
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the the safety of others.
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
is released, the BAS is deactivated. speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
I
nfor
mat
i are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
onPr
ovi
dedby:
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road- which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
way, or striking objects or other vehicles. of others.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” Hill Start Assist (HSA)
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If
the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
WARNING! HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance time expires, the system will release brake pressure and
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of
throttle applied.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
WARNING!
activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped. There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
• The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
greater hill. while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve- 5
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward tion is always required while driving to maintain
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
is in PARK. warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an • Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
incline while towing a trailer. collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING! Disabling And Enabling HSA

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may “Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC 5
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
Hill Descent Control And Selec Speed Control Switch • Vehicle speed is below 5mph
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while • Parking brake is released
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC • Driver door is closed
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Activating HDC • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
gear shift lever. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds: • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
activate. NOTE: During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmis-
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override:
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) brake application at anytime.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Deactivating HDC • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of • The parking brake is applied.
the following conditions occur:
• Driver door opens.
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph for greater
application.
than 70 seconds.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remains below
40 mph. • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (HDC exits
immediately)
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni- 5
Feedback to the driver:
tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,
or is on an uphill grade. The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
• Vehicle is shifted to park. about the state HDC is in.
Disabling HDC
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
following conditions occur: This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The driver presses the HDC switch.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met. must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
excess speed.
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will engine torque and brakes.
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have SSC has three states:
cooled sufficiently.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-
Terrain knob in the upper right position. 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
WARNING! with brake or throttle application)
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control- 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver vehicle speed)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Enabling SSC • Transmission is in any selection other than P
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the • Vehicle speed is below 20 mph
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. Additionally, the
SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
• Parking brake is released magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
• Driver door is closed
4WD Low Range Set Speeds 5
• Driver is not applying throttle
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
the following conditions are met: • 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
• Driver releases throttle • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Driver releases brake • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
I
nfor
mat
i • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
onPr
ovi
dedby:
• 7th= 4.3 mph (7 km/h) NOTE:
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h) • During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for SSC
target speed selection but will not affect the gear
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
chosen by the transmission. During SSC the transmis-
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h) sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
NOTE: These SSC default set speeds are dependent on may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
hill grade. That is the steeper the grade of the hill the Driver Override:
vehicle travels on the lower the values of the set speed
will be for all listed gears, with the minimal value being The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
.6 mph (1 km/h). brake application at any time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Deactivating SSC • The parking brake is applied.
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the • Driver door opens.
following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph for greater
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake than 70 seconds.
application.
• The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph (HDC exits
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remains below immediately).
40 mph.
Feedback To The Driver:
• Vehicle is shifted to park. The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC 5
Disabling SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur: • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
• The driver presses the SSC switch.
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the This system enhances directional control and stability of
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met. the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
excess speed. counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then maintain the desired path.
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
WARNING! path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control- priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condi- understeer condition.
tions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
vehicle speed. appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
and driving to the prevailing road conditions. which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others. 5
WARNING!
ESC Operating Modes
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre- Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the system has up to three operating modes: “ESC On”
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by “Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col-
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ESC On – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper-
⬙ESC Off⬙ indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
ating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal
on again, momentarily press the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ button and
mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or
the ⬙ESC Off⬙ indicator light will turn off. This will restore
4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power
transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
range. This mode should be used for most driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Full Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” and to “Full Off” for additional information. Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
Partial Off – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-
pressing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
the vehicle is in motion.
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than what ESC normally allows. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
WARNING!
above the climate control panel. To enter “Full Off”
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” button for five
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and running. After five seconds, the ⬙ESC Off⬙ indicator light
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. will illuminate and an “ESC Off” message will appear in
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power the odometer.
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
tem is reduced. the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 5
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode. switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),
And 4WD Low Range the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The ⬙ESC
OFF⬙ indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC
off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit Off” button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. of operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or use.
the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW
range. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
position. This will occur even if the message was Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
cleared previously. when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
WARNING! running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer- light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
diagnosed and corrected.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ indicates the
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially 5
off or full off.
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions. Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
NOTE: The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro-
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- priate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
WARNING!
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. If the TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. When TSC is trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to individual Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC can be It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch and entering occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
“ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the “ESC the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Partial Off” or “ESC Full Off” modes. Refer to the ESC Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
portion of this section for an explanation of the different pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
ESC operating modes. driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rain Brake Support (RBS) optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
steering wheel.
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It is triggered by the windshield NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
wiper setting and only functions when they are in use. realize the correct course of action through small torques
When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notifica- on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
tion to the driver and no driver interaction is required. the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
very important to realize that this feature will not steer 5
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
modules that provide a torque at the steering wheel for steering the vehicle.
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
Code (TIN) 5 — Maximum Pressure ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
3 — Service Description Temperature Grades
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards 5
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for 5
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
5
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information

Placard
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:
1) Number of people that can be carried in the ve-
hicle.
2) Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3) Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4) Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Loading To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
the weight referenced here.
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not 5
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
5
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the NOTE:
right or left. • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- erratic and unpredictable steering response.
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
Economy vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat- Tire Inflation Pressures
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. At least once a month:
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
Iinflated.
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure 5
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
temperature changes. speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- WARNING!
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
WARNING! on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
75 mph (120 km/h). meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm). Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
additional information. conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
Tire Types the tire sidewall.
5
All Season Tires – If Equipped Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be- Snow Tires
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and Run Flat Tires – If Equipped
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
safety and handling of your vehicle. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Spare Tires – If Equipped rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information. Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
CAUTION! can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare 5
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Wheel – If Equipped
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
I
nfor conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
WARNING! first opportunity.
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
only. With these spares, do not drive more than The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
WARNING!
Emergencies” for further information.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle WARNING!
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
5
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control. Tread Wear Indicators
Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

2 — New Tire higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread tenance schedule is highly recommended.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
WARNING!
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
You could lose control and have a collision resulting manual for more information relating to the Load Index
in serious injury or death. and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously 5
with oil, grease, and gasoline. affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
sion components. You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use ings.
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
capacity, other than what was originally equipped clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load against damage.
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
You could lose control and have a collision.
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
• Use on Front Tires Only Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction de-
vices are recommended: • The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire
• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
sizes are not chainable.
of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels. CAUTION! 5
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with- • Use on Front Tires Only
out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit • Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
• Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
sizes are not chainable. original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models with-
• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels. tire chains or traction devices are used with origi-
nal equipment size tires.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk important that only traction devices in good condi-
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
are used with original equipment size tires. damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
WARNING! the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
CAUTION! • Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the tions on the method of installation, operating
following precautions: speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be- suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main- 5
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed. The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation diagram.
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
CAUTION! cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de- pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
I
nfor
(Continued)
mat
i
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
onPr
ovi
dedby:
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
and natural pressure loss through the tire. a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire 5
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
value.
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
warning have been established for the tire size prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op- stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
eration or sensor damage may result when using toring Sensor.
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
NOTE:
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after- failure or condition.
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
your vehicle to your local dealership to have your while adjusting your tire pressure.
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes Base System
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
stopping ability.
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- readings to the receiver module.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
and to maintain the proper pressure. 5
ing Telltale Light.” The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
the tire.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation system fault can occur due to any of the following:
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
TPMS sensors.
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni- 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need that affects radio wave signals.
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
housings.
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Vehicles With Compact Spare
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
monitored by the TPMS.
ing limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
2. If you install the matching full-size spare in place of a Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next ignition key 5
warning limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS cycle.
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
ignition key cycle.
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above solid.
15.5 mph (25 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
Light,” as long as no tire pressure is below the
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
road tires. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and The TPMS consists of the following components:
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
• Receiver Module
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire pressure • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h)
Center (EVIC)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Premium System – If Equipped
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
readings to the receiver module.
Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly display in the EVIC.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different 5
color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the pressure
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
values in the graphic display in the EVIC will return to
their original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
monitored by the TPMS.
SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
can occur due to any of the following: that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
addition, the EVIC will display a Low Pressure mes- 5
sage, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic show-
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting ing the low tire pressure value in a different color.
that affects radio wave signals.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel 15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
housings. turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
road tires.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
values in place of the different color low tire pressure flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
value. The EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
tire. display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Vehicles With Compact Spare 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road the pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of
message.
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active FUEL REQUIREMENTS
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 2.4L Engine
20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information. All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
General Information
fuel economy and performance when us-
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and ing high quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the line having an octane rating of 87. The use
following conditions: of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
• This device may not cause harmful interference. provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these 5
engines.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
eration. your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
ing licenses: as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
United States GQ4-61T
before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto
Canada 1470A-42T I
nfor
mat
imanufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed
onPr
ovi
dedby:
consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and dura- high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to
bility for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from
the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifications if operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered
they are available. by the new vehicle warranty.
3.2L Engine Reformulated Gasoline
Your engine is designed to meet all emis- Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
sions regulations and provide satisfactory burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
fuel economy and performance when us- Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac- prove air quality.
turer recommends the use of 89 octane premium gasoline The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
for optimum performance. lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV) is compatible with gasoline
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher etha-
may be used in your vehicle. nol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
CAUTION! fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso- • Operate in a lean mode.
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob- • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. 5
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause • Poor engine performance.
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi- • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer.)
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.I
nfor
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the Materials Added To Fuel
engine controller memory. All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
exposure to E-85 fuel. detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
MMT In Gasoline
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
Fuel System Cautions
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without CAUTION!
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
life and reduces emissions system performance in some performance:
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, mance and damage the emissions control system.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal (Continued)
and California reformulated gasoline. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING!
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser- monoxide poisoning:
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
assistance. monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
5
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Most of these products contain high concentrations engine running for an extended period. If the
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
mance problems resulting from the use of such running for more than a short period, adjust the
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
manufacturer. the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control (Continued)

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle. Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door rein-
forcement.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
cap. come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel CAUTION!
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the • Damage to the fuel system or emission control
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry system could result from using an improper fuel
on the door. cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
5
is full. cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you escaping from the system.
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
properly tightened. on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Remove access door located on interior trim panel for
WARNING!
release cable with the tip of your key.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the 3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is fuel filler door.
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on. filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
could be burned. Always place gas containers on Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
the ground while filling. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further review.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
filler door emergency release. properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
1. Open the liftgate. tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLE LOADING rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Certification Label
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front 5
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Size values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. Loading
Rim Size The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
listed. by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Inflation Pressure The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
Curb Weight properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed TRAILER TOWING
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. In this section you will find safety tips and information
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
the brakes operate. review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
CAUTION! To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR follow the requirements and recommendations in this
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. 5
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the Common Towing Definitions
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
your vehicle. you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch,
you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem- Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
ready for operation⬙ condition. and trailer when weighed in combination.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
WARNING! rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weight- information.
distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
WARNING!
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
control of the vehicle and have a collision. swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or 5
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
part of the load on your vehicle. of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
Frontal Area
trailers.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Weight-Distributing Hitch Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Dis-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
tribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent WARNING!
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control system may reduce handling, stability, braking
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and performance, and could result in a collision.
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Duty
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
Class Max. Trailer Hitch In- drivetrain.
dustry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed 5
on your vehicle.
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/ Maximum GTW Maximum Tongue

Model Frontal Area
Transmission (Gross Trailer Wt.) Wt. (See Note)
2.4L/Automatic 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.2L/Automatic 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.2L/Automatic 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
with Trailer Tow
Package
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. and Operating” for further information.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
i
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom- Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
mended: guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
CAUTION!
and that it will not shift during travel. When
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
or other parts could be damaged. driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)

• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam- ratings are not exceeded:
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
1. GVWR
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your 2. GTW
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to 3. GAWR
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. 5
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
enough slack for turning corners.
Towing Requirements – Tires
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in spare tire.
PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ov
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
i
dedby:
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage. required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure. • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
CAUTION!
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits. If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake motoring safety.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
collision. pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping ness and connector.
distance. When towing you should allow for addi- NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle wiring harness. 5
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Towing Tips • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
you can get back to cruising speed.
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic. • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Automatic Transmission - If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The Cooling System
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift- heating, take the following actions:
ing does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range 5
City Driving
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
performance and extend transmission life by reducing Highway Driving
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking. Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped Air Conditioning
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. I

nfor
mat
i Turn off temporarily.
onPr
ovi
dedby:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
4WD Models
Wheel OFF the Front-Wheel Drive 1-Speed Power 2-Speed Power
Towing Condition
Ground (FWD) Models Transfer Unit Transfer Unit
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions:
• Transmission in
PARK
• Power transfer unit
in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward di-
rection
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
Models the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Automatic Transmission - If Equipped 5. Release the parking brake.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. CAUTION!
Recreational towing of automatic transmission vehicles is Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle improper towing is not covered under the New
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following Manual Transmission - If Equipped
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Front-wheel drive vehicles with manual transmissions may
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any
legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual trans-
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
mission is in NEUTRAL and the ignition is in the ACC
sion in PARK. position. These vehicles may also be towed using a tow dolly
(with the front wheels OFF the ground), or on a flatbed or
I
nfor
vehicle trailer (with all four wheels OFF the ground).
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov- transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Recreational Towing — 4WD Models with 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit Recreational Towing — 4WD Models with 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL
unit. (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recre-
ational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
adjacent to the power transfer unit selector switch. Shifts
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal • Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit transmission and/or power transfer unit damage.
will occur if a dolly is used when recreational Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
towing. der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this ve- • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
hicle backwards can cause severe damage to the on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
power transfer unit. damaged.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) 5
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
WARNING!
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
result. in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle 2. Turn the engine OFF.
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
parking brake should always be applied when the do not start the engine.
driver is not in the vehicle.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
recreational towing.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
CAUTION! the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in
the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N) progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
internal parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. 5
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
Neutral Switch tow bar.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must normal usage.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
If any of these requirements are not met prior to nected to the tow vehicle.
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator 2. Apply the parking brake.
light will flash continuously until all requirements are 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released. do not start the engine.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
by the selector switch.
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of
NEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF may be required
to avoid gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
Neutral Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13. Press and hold the brake pedal. • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally. position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .545 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .558
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .545 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 6
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .549
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
I
nfor
mat
i 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
onPr
ovi
dedby:
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .575 ▫ 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power
Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .577
▫ 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power
Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen. potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not CAUTION!
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage 6
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
other motorists.
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
an impending overheat condition: Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control Torque Specifications
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
from the engine cooling system. Bolt Size Bolt
Socket
WARNING! Size
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine 100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If **Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIREFIT Storage
WARNING!
The TIREFIT kit is stowed under the load floor behind
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, the rear seat.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may 1. Open the liftgate .
result in personal injury. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to 1/4 in (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/h).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: Load Floor Handle
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 4. Power Button
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode 6
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
TIREFIT Components for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
1. Sealant Bottle Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Selecting Sealant Mode TIREFIT Usage Precautions
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this • Using the TIREFIT sealant may cause the Tire Pressure
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant Monitoring System (TPMS) to become inoperable. It is
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting rized dealer to have the sensor function checked.
this mode. • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
Using The Power Button bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
kit. application use. After each use, always replace these
components immediately at an authorized dealer.
Using The Deflation Button
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
WARNING!
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit. • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the TIREFIT kit.
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar • Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose following circumstances:
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting 1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in- – If the tire has any sidewall damage.
tended to seal punctures less than ¼ in (6 mm) – If the tire has any damage from driving with 6
diameter in the tread of your vehicle. extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses. tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)

• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat • TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
source. an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you. Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to (A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira- Hazard Warning flashers.
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
contact with clothing. the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
to place the valve stem in this position before proceed- valve stem.
ing.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
tion.
nails) from the tire.
4. Set the parking brake.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode FIT kit. 6
position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
deflated tire. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
tire. the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn psi (5 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
On the TIREFIT kit. quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
available. Make sure the engine is running before ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
turning ON the TIREFIT kit. operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
use. Call for assistance.
I
nfor
mat
i pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure within 15 minutes: valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
hicle.”
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- CAUTION!
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit. of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- 6
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru- TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
ment panel. nent damage to the kit.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(D) Drive Vehicle: (E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
position.
WARNING! 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this stem.
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
sible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
ment.”
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening. NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
using the TIREFIT service kit.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing. (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem, 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the 6
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
vehicle.
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the of it accordingly.
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
service center.
ing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the WARNING!
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its operating the jack or changing the wheel.
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
vehicle. could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate . 6
Load Floor Handle
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle. 3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jack and Spare Tire Fastener Jack and Tool Assembly

4. Remove the chocks. NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
5. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
points holds the jack handle in place.
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly. 6. Remove the spare tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
3. Set the parking brake.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
repaired or replaced immediately.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
Preparations For Jacking opposite of the jacking position. For
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the example, if changing the right front
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery tire, chock the left rear wheel.
areas. 6
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
WARNING! when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
6
Assembled Jack
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
CAUTION! engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the sill cladding.
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jacking Locations Rear Jacking Location
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Rear Jacking Engagement Point Front Jacking Location
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
Front Jacking Engagement Point 8. Mount the spare tire.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts. 6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack 12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire result in personal injury.
repaired or replaced immediately.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
Road Tire Installation handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until 6
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
tighten the wheel bolts.
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel. than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- WARNING!
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Preparations For Jump-Start
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
precautions.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
CAUTION! protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
could establish a ground connection and personal
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
injury could result.
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
WARNING!
6
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and plosion.
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
or the discharged vehicle. could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the not use any other exposed metal parts.
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
negative (-) post of the booster battery. the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system. 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then
you should have the battery and charging system in-
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
spected at your authorized dealer.
automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelera-
CAUTION! tor.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: shifts
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
6
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
plugged in long enough without engine operation, transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from DRIVE or REVERSE.
starting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine. reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec- the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for train damage may result.
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
mode. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
CAUTION! mission shifting occurring).
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the WARNING!
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: (Continued)
(Continued)
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi- the shift lever override access hole (at the right front
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- the override release lever down.
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 6
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans-
1. Turn the engine OFF.
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 ve-
2. Apply the parking brake. hicles may also be towed as described under “Recre-
ational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center
console bezel. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condition Wheels OFF FWD MOD- 1–SPEED 2–SPEED
the Ground ELS POWER TRANSFER POWER TRANSFER
UNIT UNIT
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED See instructions under
LOWED “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direc-
tion
Wheel Lift or Dolly Rear NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Tow LOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST OK BEST METHOD
METHOD
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed. Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
position, not the ACC position. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must 6
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
discharged refer to “Shift Lever Override” in “What To towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the wheels raised).
transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can be
moved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- • DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
age from improper towing is not covered under the • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit towing.
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
OFF the ground. quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on hicle Limited Warranty.
a towing dolly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit • The transmission must be in PARK.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-
wheels OFF the ground. ing” for detailed instructions.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end CAUTION!
on a towing dolly. • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction towing.
with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
conditions: quirements can cause severe transmission and/or 6
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N) proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .583 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L . . . . . . . . . .584 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .585 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .586 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
7
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
dedby:
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 ▫ Front Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 ▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Sky Slider™ Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 ▫ Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .634
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 7
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel PROGRAMS
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
“CHECK gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
system is ready for testing.
ened.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
do the following: is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
not crank or start the engine. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
start this test over. you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part may then indicate that the system is now ready.
of a normal bulb check.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal 7
happen: vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte- WARNING!
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle You can be badly injured working on or around a
Limited Warranty. motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
DEALER SERVICE
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service chanic.
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle. vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
which may require servicing or replacement in the future. transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- procedure.
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other Engine Oil
7
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor- Checking Oil Level
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
repair center. be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to Change Engine Oil
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
fully warmed up engine is shut off. time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always tion.
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at months, whichever occurs first.
the top of the safe zone on these engines.
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION! For best performance and maximum protection under all
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
your engine. the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
Identification Symbol MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
This symbol means that the oil has peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
been certified by the American starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
Petroleum Institute (API). The cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
manufacturer only recommends grade for your engine.
API Certified engine oils.
If 0W-20 engine oil is not available, SAE 5W-20 API
Certified may be used as a temporary suitable alterna-
tive. Please ensure that you switch back to 0W-20 for the
next oil change, as indicated by your vehicles automatic
CAUTION! oil change indicator.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
7
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
ber should not be used.
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.2L Engine Materials Added To Engine Oil
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for tives.
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ber should not be used. station or governmental agency for advice on how and
Synthetic Engine Oils where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- Engine Oil Filter
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
are followed. at every engine oil change.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
WARNING!
should be used instead of a chassis hoist.
Engine Oil Filter Selection The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos- backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient near the engine compartment before starting the
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
filters and are recommended. hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
Engine Air Cleaner Filter serious personal injury.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
maintenance intervals.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters 7
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi- varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
tions” maintenance interval if applicable. used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main- flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
tenance required. a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
WARNING! clamps to touch each other.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean after handling.
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
battery that the positive cable is attached to the at the start of each warm season. This service should
positive post and the negative cable is attached to include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the time.
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion. CAUTION!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be- Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling – R134a – If
WARNING!
Equipped
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the service be performed by authorized dealer or other
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling – HFO 1234yf –
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant If Equipped
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician. HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi- Body Lubrication
tioning service be performed by authorized dealer or Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
other service facilities using recovery and recycling seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
equipment. tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
maintenance intervals. excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
WARNING! nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. 7
operating or personal injury may result.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Wiper Blades Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- liftgate glass.
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions 1 — Wiper Arm
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 2 — Pivot Cap
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
sary.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin 7
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
dedby:
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into rating information can be found on most washer fluid
place. containers.
Adding Washer Fluid
WARNING!
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front Commercially available windshield washer solvents
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir must be exercised when filling or working around
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) the washer solution.
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
Exhaust System
residual water.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
system.
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep over materials that can burn. Such materials might
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control 7
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
information.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your against you.
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
resulting in possible damage to the converter and tions, should be obtained immediately.
vehicle. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure motion.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
damage. vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires Engine Coolant Checks
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
Cooling System system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
WARNING! authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If down the face of the condenser.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the 7
entire system for leaks.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for maintenance intervals.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add cool-
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
ant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
needed to be added to the system please contact your
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
local authorized dealer.
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Selection Of Coolant
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling Adding Coolant
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine 7
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows
authorized dealer as soon as possible. extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(Continued) (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- needed to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- local authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
WARNING!
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
recovery tank. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result. 7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
bottle need only be checked once a month.
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground overfill.
spills immediately.
Points To Remember
Coolant Level
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
indicated on the bottle. ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in condenser clean.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez- ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing. result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested sions.
for leaks. Brake System
7
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) system components should be inspected periodically.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
your engine which contains aluminum components. maintenance intervals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
WARNING!
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and may be needed.
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Brake Master Cylinder • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
performing under hood services or immediately if the Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated. information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before impair its performance. The proper type of brake
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be reservoir.
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake This could result in a collision.
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may Automatic Transmission
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro- Selection Of Lubricant
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
7
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
(Continued) in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Fluid Level Check
Special Additives
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- check your transmission fluid level using special service
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sky Slider™ Top Care
CAUTION!
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. top and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the
top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol
Fluid And Filter Changes
dampened cloth.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the Washing
life of the vehicle. Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth
system is preferred.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
CAUTION! 7
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason. Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spray wand
directly at the sides of the top, as this can damage the
seal and force water past the weather strips.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
General Cleaning • Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the
in removing dust and other foreign particles. tops drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete
streaks in the material.
If Hand Washing:
• Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub-
• Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. born stains. If stains persist, contact your local autho-
rized dealership for further suggestions.
• Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.
• Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, CAUTION!
and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing
soap. Do not use detergent. Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
• Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening
• Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap it.
and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking
on painted and chrome surfaces.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Additional Cleaning Procedure
CAUTION!
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply MOPAR® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or Avoid getting Scotchguard® on the surrounding
equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches (50 weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in these items might occur.
all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
Weather Strip Care
Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still
apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR®
is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent, to keep them soft
water. Let the top dry before opening it. and pliable.
Protection Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as 7
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
Scotchguard® is suggested. The top should be clean and graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
dry before application of the protectant. passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
I
nfor
mat
i
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
onPr
ovi
dedby:
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection. Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
What Causes Corrosion?
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. and Tar Remover to remove.
The most common causes are: • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
CAUTION!
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner.
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
scratch metal and painted surfaces. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
a month. packaged and sealed.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider 7
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
open. • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives equivalent is recommended.
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Equipped
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
this is all that is required to maintain this finish. with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Cleaning Interior Trim
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Cleaning Leather Upholstery
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
Interior Care mended for leather upholstery.
Instrument Panel Cover Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery 7
use protectants or other products, which may cause and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
restore the low glare surface. and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
not required to maintain the original condition. remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
WARNING! Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in Glass Surfaces
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Cleaning Headlights with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
stone breakage than glass headlights.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. scratch the elements.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
directly on the mirror. wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care FUSES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be WARNING!
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
rag.
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
2. Dry with a soft cloth. fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown 7
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
Seat Belt Maintenance
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical injury, fire and/or property damage.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Distribution Center
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
is off and that all the other services are switched off compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
and/or disengaged. tridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
WARNING!
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag
system, braking system), power unit systems (engine
system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cavity Blade Cartridge Description Cavity Blade Cartridge Description

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F06 — — Not Used F14 10 Amp — Drivetrain Control
F07 15 Amp — Powertrain Control Red Module (DTCM) /
Blue Module - PCM Power Take-Off Unit
F08 25 Amp — Engine Control (PTU) – If Equipped /
Clear Module (ECM) Brake System Module
(BSM)
F09 — — Not Used
F10 20 Amp — Power Takeoff Unit
Yellow (PTU) F16 20 Amp — Powertrain
Yellow
F12 20 Amp — Brake Vacuum 7
Yellow Pump - If Equipped F18 — — Not Used
F13 10 Amp — Engine Control F19 — 40 Amp Starter Solenoid
Red Module (ECM) Green
F20 10 Amp — A/C Compressor
Red Clutch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F21 — — Not Used F30 10 Amp — Engine Control
F22 5 Amp — Radiator Fan Red Module (ECM)
Tan F31 — — Not Used
F23 70 Amp — Body Controller F32 — — Not Used
Tan Module (BCM) - F33 — 30 Amp Driver Door Module
Feed 1 Pink (DDM) - If Equipped
F24 — — Not Used F34 — 30 Amp Body Controller
F25 — — Not Used Pink Module (BCM) -
F26 — 30 Amp Fuel Heater - Diesel Feed 3
Pink Only F35 — — Not Used
F27 — — Not Used F36 — — Not Used
F28 15 Amp — Transmission Con- F37 — 50 Amp Voltage Stabilization
Blue trol Module (TCM) Red Module (VSM) - If
F29 — — Not Used Equipped With Stop/
Start Engine Option
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F38 — 60 Amp Glow Plugs - Diesel F44 — 30 Amp Trailer Tow / 7-Way
Yellow Only - If Equipped Pink Connector - If
F39 — 40 Amp HVAC Blower Motor Equipped
Green F45 — 30 Amp Passenger Door Mod-
F40 — 20 Amp Trailer Tow Park Pink ule (PDM) - If
Blue Light - If Equipped Equipped
F41 — 60 Amp Body Controller F46 — 25 Amp Sunroof / Skyslider
Yellow Module (BCM) - Clear - If Equipped
Feed 2 F47 — 30 Amp Drivetrain Control
F42 — 30 Amp Electric Park Brake Pink Module (DTCM)
Pink (EPB) - Left F48 — — Not Used 7
F43 20 Amp — Trailer Tow Left F49 — 30 Amp Power Inverter
Yellow Stop/Turn Light - If Pink (115V A/C) - If
Equipped Equipped
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F50 — 30 Amp Power Liftgate - If F55 10 Amp — Blind Spot Sensors /
Pink Equipped Red Compass / Rearview
F51 — — Not Used Camera If Equipped
F52 — — Not Used / Rear Seat Heater
Switches / Trunk
F53 — 30 Amp BSM-ECU & Valves Lamp W/ Flashlamp
Pink Charger
F54 — 30 Amp Urea Heater Control F56 15 Amp — Ignition Node Mod-
Pink Unit - If Equipped Blue ule (IGNM)/
With Diesel Engine KIN/RF Hub/
Electric Steering
Column Lock (ESL)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F57 20 Amp — Fuel Pump Motor F64 25 Amp — Heated Steering
Yellow Clear Wheel / Rear
F58 10 Amp — Occupant Classifica- Heated Seats - If
Red tion Module Equipped
F59 — — Not Used F65 15 Amp — HVAC (ECC) / In-
F60 20 Amp — Power Outlet - Cen- Blue strument Panel
Yellow ter Console Cluster (IPC)
F61 — — Not Used F66 10 Amp — In Car Temperature
Red Sensor / Humidity
F62 10 Amp — Heated Mirrors - If Sensor / Driver As-
Red Equipped sist System Module 7
F63 25 Amp — Front Heated Seats - (DASM) / Park As-
Clear If Equipped sist (PAM)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F67 — — Not Used F72 20 Amp — Trailer Tow RT Stop
F68 — — Not Used Yellow / Turn Lights - If
F69 10 Amp — Power Transfer Unit Equipped
Red Switch (TSBM) / F73 — 30 Amp Rear Defroster /
Active Grill Shutter Pink Defogger
(AGS) - If Equipped F74 — 20 Amp Engine Control
F70 — — Not Used Blue Module (ECM)
F71 20 Amp — Windshield De-Icer Gasoline Engine - If
Yellow - If Equipped Equipped
F72 5 Amp — Intelligent Battery F75 20 Amp — Cigar Lighter
Tan Sensor (IBS) If Yellow
Equipped With F76 20 Amp — Rear Differential
Stop/Start Engine Yellow Module (RDM) - If
Option Equipped
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F77 10 Amp — Fuel Door Release/ F82 — — Not Used
Red Brake Pedal Switch F83 — 30 Amp Headlamp Washer
F78 10 Amp — Diagnostic Port / Pink Pump - If Equipped
Red Steering Column F84 — 40 Amp Brake System Mod-
Control Module Green ule (BSM) - Pump
(SCCM) / Digital Motor If Equipped
TV - If Equipped With Diesel Engine
F79 10 Amp — Integrated Center F84 — 20 Amp Trailer Tow Backup
Red Stack (ICS) / HVAC Blue Lights - If Equipped
/ Aux Switch Bank With Gasoline En-
Module (ASBM) / gine 7
Instrument Panel F85 — — Not Used
Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp — Radio / CD - If
Yellow Equipped F87 — — Not Used
F81 — — Not Used I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
F88 15 Amp — Collision Mitigation F93 — 40 Amp Brake System Mod-
Blue Module (CMM) / Green ule (BSM) - Pump
Electrochromatic Motor - If Equipped
Mirror / Smart With Gasoline En-
Camera Module - If gine
Equipped F94 — 30 Amp Electric Park Brake
F89 10 Amp — Headlamp Leveling Pink (EPB) - Right
Red - If Equipped F95 10 Amp — Electrochromatic
F90 — — Not Used Red Mirror / Rain Sen-
F91 — — Not Used sor / Sunroof - If
F92 20 Amp — Rear Power Outlet Equipped
Yellow F96 10 Amp — Occupant Restraint
Red Controller (ORC)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cavity Blade Cartridge Description Cavity Blade Fuse Description

Fuse Fuse F13 15 Amp Low Beam Left
F97 10 Amp — Occupant Restraint Blue
Red Controller (ORC) F32 10 Amp Interior Lighting
F98 25 Amp — Audio Amplifier - If Red
Clear Equipped F36 10 Amp Intrusion Module/Siren
F99 — 30 Amp Trailer Tow Module - Red – If Equipped
Pink If Equipped With F38 20 Amp Deadbolt All Unlock
Gasoline Engine Yellow
F100 — — Not Used F43 20 Amp Washer Pump Front
Interior Fuses Yellow
F48 25 Amp Fog Lamp Rear Left/
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com- Clear Right – If Equipped
7
partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-
ment panel. F49 7.5 Amp Lumbar Support
Brown
F50 7.5 Amp Wireless Charging Pad If
Brown Equipped
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cavity Blade Fuse Description VEHICLE STORAGE

F51 10 Amp Driver Window Switch/ If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
Red Power Mirrors – If days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
Equipped You may:
F53 7.5 Amp UCI Port (USB & AUX) • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Brown
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
F89 10 Amp Door Locks – Driver Un- service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
Red lock air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
F91 7.5 Amp Fog Lamp Front Left in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
Brown ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
F92 7.5 Amp Fog Lamp Front Right possibility of compressor damage when the system is
Brown started again.
F93 10 Amp Low Beam Right
Red
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REPLACEMENT BULBS Bulb Number
Front Park/Daytime LED (Serviced at an Au-
Interior Bulbs Running Lamps thorized Dealer)
Bulb Number Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Cargo Lamp TL212–2 Front Fog Lamps H11
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A Front Fog Lamps (Trail- PSX24W
Reading Lamp WL212–2 hawk)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED ( Serviced at an Au-
Exterior Bulbs thorized Dealer)
Bulb Number Rear Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Low Beam/High Beam HIR2 Center High Mounted LED (Serviced at an Au-
(Bi-Halogen) Headlamps Stop Lamp (CHMSL) thorized Dealer) 7
Low Beam/High Beam D3S (Serviced at an Au- Back-Up Lamps W16W
(Bi-Xenon) Headlamps thorized Dealer) License Plate Lamp W5W
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
WARNING!
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID) ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
Headlamps — If Equipped cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge dealer for service.
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
with the headlamp switch off and the key removed.
Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID 1. Unlock upper access door in wheel liner.
headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
headlamp bulb cap.
service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to 7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and
unlock it. rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and 8. Lock upper door in wheel liner.
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
Front Turn Signals
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
1. Open the hood.
then connect the replacement bulb.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
CAUTION! necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the 2. Twist the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise,
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the and then remove the bulb and socket assembly from
bulb with rubbing alcohol. the lamp housing.
7
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
ment bulb.
lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
CAUTION!
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
Front Fog Lamp bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb. 5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove to lock it in place.
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb. Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and Rear Turn Signal Lamp
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
1. Open the liftgate.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the 4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
bulb with rubbing alcohol. 5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog 6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
lamp housing until it locks in place.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
7
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
10. Close the liftgate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Back-up Lamp 8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
1. Open the liftgate. 9. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the 10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
lower trim from the liftgate.
11. Close the liftgate.
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
License Plate Lamp
panel.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
the lamp assembly for removal.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
lamp.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Cool- 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Cool- 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters 7
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
If 0W-20 engine oil is not available, SAE 5W-20 API Certified may be used as a
temporary suitable alternative. Please ensure that you switch back to 0W-20 for the
next oil change, as indicated by your vehicles automatic oil change indicator.
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.047 in [1.2 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.2L Engine 87-89 Octane
Chassis

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission. 7
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
CONTENTS N
A
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M 644 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
N equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
T Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
A
N scheduled maintenance. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
C message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
E Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
C referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
H such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
E cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
D “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-
U strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
L ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
E illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
S further information.
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
8 within the next 500 miles (805 km). NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 645 M
A
Severe Duty All Models Required Maintenance Intervals. I
N
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following T
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This page for the required maintenance intervals. E
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty N
A
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil N
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Change Indicator System: C
• Check engine oil level • Change oil and filter E
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu- S
• Check windshield washer fluid level lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator C
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or system turns on. H
E
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as D
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns required U
on. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses L
E
and park brake S
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses 8
brake master cylinder, fill as needed
• Inspect exhaust system
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
E pages for the required maintenance intervals.
N
A
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
N
C Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
E
S Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
C 128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
H
E Or Kilometers:
D
U Additional Inspections
L
E Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
S Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
8 and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 647 M
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000 N
Or Kilometers: C
E
Additional Maintenance S
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X C
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X H
E
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine ** X D
Replace spark plugs – 3.2L Engine ** X U
L
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or E
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. S
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X 8
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
N motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
A have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
S
C • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
H hicle could result in a component malfunction and
E effect vehicle handling and performance. This
D
U could cause an accident.
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .651 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .653 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .653
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 9
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .656
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
650 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 651
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and center.
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
ter should include the following information:
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Owner’s name and address
correctly and in a timely manner. • Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Authorized dealer name
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
P.O. Box 21–8004 Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
Phone: (877) 426–5337 cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
P.O. Box 1621 (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
In Mexico Contact: by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Service Contract
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to 9
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu- We appreciate that you have made a major investment
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac- when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur- sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800- concerns.
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English /
(800) 387–9983 French). WARNING!
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
is not responsible for any service contract other than the known to the State of California to cause cancer and
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
contract documents, and contact the person listed in and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
those documents.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARRANTY INFORMATION If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® PARTS dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
operating at its best. tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
9
manufacturer. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Canada Service Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
should contact the Customer Service Department imme- mation that students and professional technicians need in
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ system, and/or components is written in straightforward
roadsafety/ language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Owner’s Manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac- The following tire grading categories were established by
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte- specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and safety tips. your vehicle.
Call toll free at: All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Treadwear
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
Or the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
• www.techauthority.com times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the 9
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
WARNING!
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
Traction Grades straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, peak traction characteristics.
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions Temperature Grades
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
mance. and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
662 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .189 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .593 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .19
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .397
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 663
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .294 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Caps, Filler
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
664 INDEX
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Cleaning
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .607
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .586 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 665
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Disposal
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .294
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .185
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .272
Dipsticks Emergency, In Case of
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
666 INDEX
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .586 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Filters
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 667
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Flashers Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Fluid Level Checks Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .640 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
668 INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Gauges High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .172
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 . . .167
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 . . .154
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 . . .417
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .172
Headlights Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 669
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Hitches Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Ignition Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
670 INDEX
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 671
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .325 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .175 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .325 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .325
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
672 INDEX
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 673
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .294
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Sunroof (Sky Slider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Pretensioners
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .607
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .481 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Power Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
674 INDEX
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .537 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .540 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596 Roof
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Sky Slider Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .383 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 675
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .61 Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Shifting
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
676 INDEX
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Steering
Sky Slider Power Roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .383
Specifications Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Sun Roof (Sky Slider Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .67
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 677
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .397 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .480 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
678 INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Transfer Case
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .275
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 679
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Wireless Charging Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on EQUIPMENT
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
features and equipment that are no longer available or were vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone fully shielded coaxial cable.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of and equipment described in this manual that are not on this equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
accidents. vehicle. The following must be observed during installation.
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in The positive power connection should be made directly to
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink- Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, normal may require special precautions.
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- negative power connection should be made to body sheet
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu- metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This All installations should be checked for possible interference
factured. connection should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
WARNING! electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
and your judgment is impaired when you have been the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC equipped.
I
nfor
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on EQUIPMENT
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
features and equipment that are no longer available or were vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone fully shielded coaxial cable.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of and equipment described in this manual that are not on this equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
accidents. vehicle. The following must be observed during installation.
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in The positive power connection should be made directly to
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink- Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, normal may require special precautions.
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- negative power connection should be made to body sheet
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu- metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This All installations should be checked for possible interference
factured. connection should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
WARNING! electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
and your judgment is impaired when you have been the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC equipped.
COVER INCOVER IN
2014 Grand Cherokee
2014 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group
Chrysler Group LLC
LLC I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14KL74-126-AB
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition
Second Edition Printed in
Printed in U.S.A.
U.S.A.
1283259cv1 14WK741-126-AA Grand Cherokee Chrysler 1" gutter 12/05/2012 15:56:03
2014 Grand Cherokee

2014 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2014 Cherokee

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Cherokee

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Cherokee

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Cherokee

14KL74-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Right Front Body VIN Location

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal (KIN)

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

Emergency Key Removal (KIN)

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

Emergency Key Removal (KIN) Remove Screw From Transmitter Case

Power Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door

Power Window Switches

Window Lockout Switch

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be opened by pressing

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

Removing Slack From Belt

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Power Mirror Switches

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED

Warning Light Location

Rear Cross Path

Power Seat Switch

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Power Seat Recliner Switch

Power Lumbar Switch

Front Seat Adjustment

Rear Head Restraints

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location

Instrument Panel Dimmer

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Windshield Wiper Operation

Intermittent Wiper System

Windshield Washer Operation

Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

LaneSense Warning Button

Lane Sense On Message

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid White Thin

Lane Approached (Flashing Thin Yellow Line To Thick

Lane Approached (Flashing Thick Line/Flashing Yellow